JP5976083B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols drawn on the peripheral surface, and a display window for displaying a part of the symbols drawn on the peripheral surfaces of the plurality of reels, the game value such as a medal by the player A gaming machine (a so-called “pachi-slot”) in which symbols are stopped and displayed on the display window by rotating all reels based on the loading operation and starting operation on the start lever, and stopping each reel based on the stop button operation by the player. )It has been known. Such a gaming machine is a player when a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on a predetermined line (hereinafter referred to as “effective line”) among symbols displayed on the display window. A privilege (for example, a medal) is given to.

  In addition, such a gaming machine detects the operation of the start lever by the player, extracts a predetermined random number value based on the detection of the operation of the start lever, and extracts the extracted random number value for each winning combination. The winning combination is determined based on the winning combination determination table in which the lottery value is defined, and reel stop control is performed based on the determined winning combination and the stop button operation by the player. Here, depending on the determined winning combination, it may be permitted to display a plurality of symbol combinations on the active line among predetermined symbol combinations.

  At this time, when “losing” is determined as the winning combination, a combination of symbols that can receive a privilege is not displayed regardless of the operation of the stop button at any timing. In addition, if the stop button is not operated at an appropriate timing, the winning combination will not be displayed on the active line in combination with the winning combination, or if the stop button is operated at any timing, There is a winning combination in which such a combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  In other words, if the winning combination is determined as a winning combination that does not stop and display the combination of symbols related to the winning combination unless the stop button is operated at the appropriate timing, the stop operation is performed at the appropriate timing. Since it is necessary to do this, the player is required to have a certain skill regarding the operation of the stop button.

  Further, in such a gaming machine, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, a state advantageous to the player compared to the normal state (hereinafter referred to as “specific state”). ”) Is performed. Here, the “specific state” is a bonus game in which a probability that a combination of symbols from which medals are paid out (hereinafter referred to as “a combination of symbols related to winning a prize”) is displayed on the active line is improved as compared to the normal state. (“RB (regular bonus)”, “BB (big bonus)”, “CB (challenge bonus)”, “MB (middle bonus)”, etc.) If the symbol combination is not displayed (or if the stop button is not operated in the appropriate order, the symbol combination related to the winning combination with the smaller number of medals will be displayed) In addition, “AT (assist time)” that informs the appropriate operation order of the stop button, etc., and operating the start lever without performing the medal insertion operation More re-game the player is started to improve the probability of being determined as the winning combination "RT (replay time)", AT and RT is activated at the same time there is a such as "ART (assisted replay time)". Therefore, the player plays a game while desiring to shift to a specific state advantageous to the player.

  By the way, in recent gaming machines, in the award games represented by the above-mentioned “RB (Regular Bonus)”, “BB (Big Bonus)”, etc., the amusement game is enlivened in order to further improve the gaming interest. There are some game machines that can play music.

  For example, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 is configured to change the music that can be played during a special game based on the number of consecutive RTs in an advantageous RT gaming state that is advantageous to the player and the net increase in the number of acquired medals. doing.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to realize a variety of game playability during a bonus game and to achieve a sense of achievement for the player.

JP 2009-195426 A

  By the way, privilege games often have a plurality of types of privilege games. For example, there are privilege games with a small number of games that a player can play and privilege games with a large number of games that a player can play. To do. Thus, in the case of a gaming machine having a plurality of types of privilege games, for example, in a privilege game with a small number of games that a player can play, it can be played because the time spent in the privilege game is short There was a risk that it would not be possible to fully enjoy such music, and this could lead to a decline in the fun of gaming.

  In view of such circumstances, an object of the present invention is to prevent a decrease in gaming interest in a gaming machine capable of reproducing music during a bonus game.

To solve such problems, a game machine according to the present invention, by a predetermined condition is satisfied, the gaming machine performs determination of whether or not to transit to the advantageous benefits Yu technique for the player, the privilege If it is determined that shifting to a game, award a game to determine the first award Yu technique, the game period is longer second privilege Yu technique than the first award game, the award game given to the player determining means, in the music data based on the same song, minutes ordinary reproduction unit starting from the first timing, specific playback unit fraction that originates second timing later than the first timing through the music data storage means for storing composed music data, and sound output means to output music based on the music data stored in the music data storage means, said sound output means and said music Based on data Comprising Ku and sound control hand stage for performing output control of the music, and the sound control means, by the award game determination means, when it is determined to grant the first award game is the first award game during execution, based on said music data, pre Symbol Outputs the music from a specific playback section, by the award game determination means, when it is determined to grant the second award game, the second during execution of the award game, on the basis of the music data, from front Symbol normal reproduction portion after outputs the music, and the said output to Rukoto music according to prior Symbol specific playback section .

  In order to solve such a problem, a gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols arranged on a peripheral surface, a start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player, Based on the fact that the start operation is detected by the start operation detecting means, the winning combination determining means for determining the winning combination and the stop operating means provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels are stopped. Based on the fact that the start operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means to be detected and the start operation detecting means, the plurality of reels are variably displayed, and the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. And a reel control means for stopping and displaying the plurality of reels, and when the first special winning combination is determined by the winning combination determining means, the first advantageous combination for the player is provided. When a special game (for example, the first Bonus state) is granted and the second special winning combination is determined by the winning combination determining means, a second special game (for the player that is more advantageous than the first special game) ( For example, memorizing music data composed of a bonus game determining means for giving a third Bonus state), a normal reproduction part (for example, a part connected to the chorus part of the music) and a specific reproduction part (a chorus part of the music) Music data storage means for performing, and sound output means for outputting music based on the music data stored in the music data storage means (upper left speaker 40, lower left speaker 41, upper right speaker 42, lower right speaker 43); Sound control means (liquid crystal control CPU 601) for performing output control of music based on the music data via the sound output means, and the sound control means comprises: In the case where the first privilege game is given by the privilege game determination means, during the execution of the first privilege game, based on the music data, the music from the specific reproduction part which is the second timing When the second bonus game is given by the bonus game determination means, the normal timing which is the first timing is based on the music data during the execution of the second bonus game. After performing output control of the music piece from the reproduction part, output control of the music piece related to the specific reproduction part as the second timing may be performed.

  In order to solve such a problem, a gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols arranged on a peripheral surface, a start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player, Based on the fact that the start operation is detected by the start operation detecting means, the winning combination determining means for determining the winning combination and the stop operating means provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels are stopped. Based on the fact that the start operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means to be detected and the start operation detecting means, the plurality of reels are variably displayed, and the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. And a reel control means for stopping and displaying the plurality of reels, and when the first special winning combination is determined by the winning combination determining means, the playable period is the first period. When the first special game (for example, the first Bonus state) composed of (for example, 30 games) is given and the second special winning combination is determined by the winning combination determining means, the game available period is Special game determination means for granting a second special game (for example, the third Bonus state) composed of a second period (for example, 50 games) longer than the first period, and a normal reproduction portion (for example, a song) Music data storage means for storing music data composed of a part connected to the chorus part) and a specific reproduction part (the chorus part of the music), and outputs music based on the music data stored in the music data storage means Sound output means (upper left speaker 40, lower left speaker 41, upper right speaker 42, lower right speaker 43) and the music output based on the music data through the sound output means. Sound control means (liquid crystal control CPU 601) for performing force control, and the sound control means is executing the first bonus game when the bonus game determination means grants the first bonus game. In addition, based on the music data, when the music is output from the specific playback portion that is the second timing and the second bonus game is given by the bonus game determining means, the second bonus game is given. During the execution of the privilege game, after the music is output from the normal playback portion at the first timing based on the music data, the music related to the specific playback portion at the second timing is output. It is good also as controlling output.

  Here, the “privileged game” may be any game state as long as it is advantageous to the player as compared to the normal game state. For example, a bonus gaming state such as a big bonus or a regular bonus, an RT gaming state in which a re-playing role is established with a high probability, an AT state in which an operation order notification of a specific role is made, and an ART state that has both of these (shown as a bonus game) In addition, the winning device is opened for a predetermined time, and the winning game state in which the game ball can enter, the probability changing gaming state in which the winning probability to the winning game state is improved, and the openable winning device For example, a short game state when the player opens with high probability.

  Further, “satisfying a predetermined condition” corresponds to an operation means being operated by a player, a predetermined symbol combination being stopped and displayed, a game ball winning a winning opening, and the like.

  The “first privilege game” corresponds to a bonus game with a small number of games that can be played, a regular bonus, or a jackpot game with a small number of games that can be played.

  Further, the “second bonus game” corresponds to a bonus game with a large number of games that can be played, a big bonus, a jackpot game with a large number of games that can be played, or the like. In addition, since the number of games that can be played and the number of rounds that can be played are greater in the second privilege game than in the first privilege game, the time required to play the second privilege game is: It is characterized by being longer than the time required to play the first privilege game. Further, basically, the game value given to the player in the second privilege game is greater than that in the first privilege game. Therefore, in terms of the degree of advantage for the player, it can be said that the second privilege game is more advantageous than the first privilege game.

  The “music data” may be one data composed of a normal reproduction part and a specific reproduction part, or one data in a normal reproduction part and one data in a specific reproduction part. May be.

  Further, “being executed in the first privilege game” means that the first privilege game is being executed from the timing when the combination of symbols constituting the first privilege game is stopped and displayed, or the first privilege game is configured. The first privilege game may be being executed from a timing after a predetermined time has elapsed since the combination of symbols was stopped and displayed.

  Further, “during execution of the second privilege game” means that the second privilege game is being executed from the timing when the combination of symbols constituting the second privilege game is stopped and displayed, or constitutes the second privilege game. The second privilege game may be being executed from the timing after a predetermined time has elapsed since the combination of symbols was stopped and displayed.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, in the game machine which can reproduce | regenerate a music during a privilege game, the fall of a game interest can be prevented.

It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of a gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal structure of a cabinet. It is a figure which shows an example of the back surface of a front door. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the movable aspect of a production | presentation apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of an arrangement | sequence data table. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in case a symbol combination group is "00". It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in case a symbol combination group is "01". It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in case a symbol combination group is "02". It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in case a symbol combination group is "03". It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in case a symbol combination group is "04". It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship of a winning combination, the operation order of a stop button, and winning a prize. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st winning combination determination table for non-RT game states. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st winning combination determination table for 1st RT gaming states. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st winning combination determination table for 2nd RT gaming states. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st winning combination determination table for 3RT gaming states. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st winning combination determination table for 4th RT gaming states. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st winning combination determination table for 5RT gaming states. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st winning combination determination table for 6RT gaming states. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd winning combination determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a game state transition diagram. It is a figure which shows an example of the list of the states managed by a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the transition diagram of the state managed by a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a Bonus state distribution lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a precursor game number determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a chance state transfer lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the fake game number determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a promotion lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of an ART preparation state transfer lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the number of games for ART state, and a lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a drawing-back lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of an addition state transfer lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the program start process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the main loop process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the start lever check process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol code setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel rotation start preparation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel stop pre-process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process during reel rotation in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the display determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state transfer process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of RT game state transfer process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the interruption process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the main process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the main board | substrate communication process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the command analysis process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process according to command in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of the conditional device command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for normal states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for chance precursor states in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for Bonus precursor state in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for chance states in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for Bonus preparation states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 1st Bonus states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 2nd Bonus states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 3rd Bonus states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 1st fall standby states in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for ART preparation states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for ART states in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for the 1st addition sign state in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for the 1st addition preparation state in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for the 1st addition state in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 2nd fall standby states in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for the 2nd surrender sign state in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for the 2nd addition preparation state in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for the 2nd addition state in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 3rd fall standby states in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 4th fall standby states in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for Bonus preparation state at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 1st fall standby states at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for ART preparation state at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 1st addition preparation states at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 2nd addition preparation state at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 2nd fall standby states at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 3rd fall standby states at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 4th fall standby states at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the main process in an effect control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound reproduction control process in an effect control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the channel setting process in an effect control board. It is a figure which shows the timing chart 1 which concerns on the sound control in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing chart 2 which concerns on the sound control in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing chart 3 which concerns on the sound control in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing chart 4 which concerns on the sound control in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing chart 5 which concerns on the sound control in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the animation 1 which concerns on the sound control in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing chart 6 which concerns on the sound control in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the animation 2 which concerns on the sound control in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the volume graph which concerns on the sound control in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing chart 7 which concerns on the sound control in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing chart 8 which concerns on the sound control in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing chart 9 which concerns on the sound control in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing chart 10 which concerns on the sound control in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing chart 11 which concerns on the sound control in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the channel state management map with respect to the speaker of liquid crystal control CPU in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the channel state management map explaining the search method of the output stop audio | voice data based on the priority in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the channel state management map explaining the search method of the output stop audio | voice data based on the remaining reproduction time in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the channel state management map explaining the search method of the output stop audio | voice data based on the reproduction start time in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the channel state management map explaining the overwrite output of the same audio | voice in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing chart which concerns on the overwrite output of the same audio | voice in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing chart which concerns on the alerting | reporting in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the channel state management map explaining the search method of the output stop audio | voice data only by the priority of the audio | voice data in output in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the waveform which concerns on the payout sound in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the principal part of the game machine in 2nd Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(First embodiment)
(Composition of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating an example of a front view of a gaming machine, and FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of an internal structure of a cabinet 2. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of the back surface of the front door 3.

(Game machine 1)
The gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment includes a cabinet 2 described later, a front door 3 and the like.

(Cabinet 2)
The cabinet 2 is a substantially rectangular box and has an opening on the front side. A plurality of components are attached to the cabinet 2.

(Front door 3)
The front door 3 is attached so as to close the opening on the front side of the cabinet 2. A plurality of components are attached to the front door 3.

(Hinge mechanism 4)
The hinge mechanism 4 is provided on the left side of the cabinet 2 as viewed from the front, and is provided to pivotally support the front door 3 so that it can be opened and closed.

(Keyhole 5)
The keyhole 5 is provided at the center right side of the front door 3 and is provided for unlocking the front door 3 by a locking device (not shown). Here, when a store clerk or the like of the game store performs maintenance work, changes a set value, or the like, the locking device (not shown) provided on the front door 3 is unlocked. First, a door key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole 5 of the front door 3 and is unlocked by rotating it by a predetermined angle in the clockwise direction. Next, the front door 3 is opened, and work such as maintenance work and setting value change is performed. When the maintenance work or the work such as changing the set value is completed, the front door 3 is closed and locked.

(Medal slot 6)
The medal slot 6 is provided on the upper left side of the keyhole 5 when viewed from the front, and is provided for a player to insert a medal.

(BET button 7)
The BET button 7 is provided on the left side of the medal insertion slot 6 when viewed from the front, and is provided for using “1” medals among the stored medals in the game.

(MAXBET button 8)
The MAXBET button 8 is provided on the right side of the BET button 7 when viewed from the front, and is provided to use the maximum number of medals that can be used in one game ("1" game) among the stored (credit) medals. It has been. Here, in this embodiment, the maximum value of medals that can be used in one game is “3”.

(Checkout button 9)
The settlement button 9 is provided on the back side of the BET button 7 and is provided for settlement of medals stored (credited) among medals acquired by the player. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of medals that can be stored (credited) is “50”.

(Start lever 10)
The start lever 10 is provided below the BET button 7. The start lever 10 is provided for the player to perform a start operation that triggers the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 described later. Here, based on the detection of the start operation by the player, the main control board 300 described later starts processing for obtaining a hard random number and rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 described later. The processing to do is performed.

(Left stop button 11)
The left stop button 11 is provided on the right side of the start lever 10 in front view. The left stop button 11 is provided for the player to perform a stop operation that triggers the rotation of the left reel 18 to be described later.

(Intermediate stop button 12)
The middle stop button 12 is provided on the right side of the left stop button 11 when viewed from the front. Further, the middle stop button 12 is provided for the player to perform a stop operation that triggers the stop of the rotation of the middle reel 19 described later.

(Right stop button 13)
The right stop button 13 is provided on the right side of the middle stop button 12 when viewed from the front. The right stop button 13 is provided for the player to perform a stop operation that triggers the rotation of the right reel 20 to be described later.

(Return button 14)
The return button 14 is provided on the right side of the right stop button 13 when viewed from the front. The return button 14 is provided to return a jammed medal when a medal inserted into the medal slot 6 is jammed in a selector 15 described later.

(Selector 15)
The selector 15 is provided on the back side of the front door 3. The selector 15 is provided to determine whether or not the material or shape of the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 is appropriate.

(Error cancel sensor 16s)
The error release sensor 16s is provided on the back side of the keyhole 5, and is provided to release an error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1. Here, the error release sensor 16s includes a light emitting part and a light receiving part, and when a door key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole 5 and the door key (not shown) is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle, A locking part (not shown) will rotate. And the light-receiving part cannot receive the light emitted from the light-emitting part when the locking part rotates. As a result, the error release sensor 16s detects an error release operation for releasing an error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1.

(Door open / close sensor 17s)
The door opening / closing sensor 17s is provided on the back side of the keyhole 5, and is provided to detect whether or not the front door 3 is open. The door opening / closing sensor 17s includes a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion. When a door key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole 5 and the door key (not shown) is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle, the door opening / closing sensor 17s is locked. The part (not shown) will rotate. And the light-receiving part cannot receive the light emitted from the light-emitting part when the locking part rotates. Thereby, the door open / close sensor 17s detects the opening of the front door 3.

(Left reel 18)
The left reel 18 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and has a cylindrical structure. Further, a translucent sheet is mounted on the peripheral surface of the cylindrical structure of the left reel 18, and a plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a row on the sheet. The left reel 18 is rotationally driven by a left stepping motor 151 described later, and a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed.

(Middle reel 19)
The middle reel 19 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and has a cylindrical structure. Further, a translucent sheet is mounted on the peripheral surface of the cylindrical structure of the middle reel 19, and a plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a row on the sheet. The middle reel 19 is driven to rotate by a middle stepping motor 152, which will be described later, and a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed.

(Right reel 20)
The right reel 20 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and has a cylindrical structure. In addition, a translucent sheet is mounted on the peripheral surface of the cylindrical structure of the right reel 20, and a plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a row on the sheet. The right reel 20 is rotationally driven by a right stepping motor 153, which will be described later, and a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed.

(Direction button 21)
The effect button 21 is provided on the right side of the MAXBET button 8 when viewed from the front, and is provided for the player to operate at a predetermined timing. The effect button 21 is connected to an effect button sensor 710s described later. Here, the below-described sub control board 400 controls the later-described liquid crystal display device 46 and the like via the below-described effect control board 600 when an after-mentioned effect button sensor 710s detects an operation of the effect button 21. .

(Cross key 22)
The cross key 22 is provided on the right side of the effect button 21 when viewed from the front. The cross key 22 includes an up button, a down button, a left button, and a right button, and is provided for a player to operate at a predetermined timing. It has been. In addition, a cross key board 711 described later is connected to the cross key 22. The sub-control board 400 described later controls the liquid crystal display device 46 described later via the effect control board 600 described later when the cross-key board 711 described later detects the operation of the cross key 22.

(Display window 23)
The display window 23 is provided on the front side of the left reel 18, middle reel 19, and right reel 20, and a plurality of symbols drawn on the peripheral surfaces of the left reel 18, middle reel 19, and right reel 20 can be visually recognized. Is provided to do. Specifically, “3” symbols drawn on the peripheral surface of the left reel 18, “3” symbols drawn on the peripheral surface of the middle reel 19, and drawn on the peripheral surface of the right reel 20. A total of “9” symbols of “3” symbols can be viewed through the display window 23.

(Start lamp 24)
The start lamp 24 is provided above the BET button 7 and is provided to notify whether or not the start operation can be received by the start lever 10. Specifically, the main control board 300 to be described later has a case where the number of medals used in the game is “3” by the operation of the BET button 7 and the MAXBET button 8, or “3” in the medal slot 6. When a medal is inserted, a start operation is started by the start lever 10 by turning on the start lamp 24 when a combination of symbols related to “replay” to be described later is displayed on the active line in the previous game. To notify that it is possible to accept the message.

(Effective line)
Here, in the present embodiment, among the symbols displayed on the display window 23, the effective line is a symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 18, a symbol displayed on the middle stage of the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. Only the “down-right line” connecting the symbols displayed in the lower row with straight lines is the effective line.

  Here, in the present embodiment, among the symbols displayed on the display window 23, (a) the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 18, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. A line obtained by connecting the symbols displayed in the upper line with a straight line is referred to as an “upper line”. (B) The symbol displayed in the middle of the left reel 18, the symbol displayed in the middle of the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. A line connecting the symbols displayed in the middle row with a straight line is referred to as a “middle row”. (C) The symbol displayed in the lower row of the left reel 18, the symbol displayed in the lower row of the middle reel 19, and the right reel A line formed by connecting the symbols displayed in the lower part of the line 20 with a straight line is referred to as a “lower line”. (D) The symbol displayed in the lower part of the left reel 18, the symbol displayed in the middle part of the middle reel 19, The pattern displayed on the top of the reel 20 is a straight line. The do's line of "upward-sloping line". The effective line may be the upper line, the middle line, the lower line, and the upper right line instead of the lower right line. In addition to the lower right line, the upper line, the middle line, the lower line, and the right line Lines may be applied.

(First BET lamp 25)
The first BET lamp 25 is provided on the right side of the start lamp 24 when viewed from the front, and is provided to notify that the BET number is “1”. Specifically, the main control board 300 to be described later is configured to bet the BET when “1” or more medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 or when “1” or more medals are stored (credit). For example, when the button 7 or the MAXBET button 8 is operated, the first BET lamp 25 is turned on.

(Second BET lamp 26)
The second BET lamp 26 is provided above the first BET lamp 25 and is provided to notify that the BET number is “2”. Specifically, the main control board 300 to be described later is a BET in a case where “2” or more medals are inserted into the medal slot 6 or in a state where “2” or more medals are stored (credit). For example, when the button 7 is operated “2” times, the second BET lamp 26 is turned on.

(3rd BET lamp 27)
The third BET lamp 27 is provided above the second BET lamp 26 and is provided to notify that the BET number is “3”. Specifically, the main control board 300 described later has a MAXBET button when “3” medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 or in a state where “3” or more medals are stored (credit). When No. 8 is operated, the third BET lamp 27 is turned on, for example, when a combination of symbols related to “replay” to be described later is displayed on the active line in the previous game.

(Storage number indicator 28)
The stored number indicator 28 is provided on the right side of the first BET lamp 25, the second BET lamp 26, and the third BET lamp 27 as viewed from the front. The stored number display 28 is provided to display the number of stored (credit) medals of the player stored in the gaming machine 1.

(Payout number display 29)
The payout number indicator 29 is provided on the right side of the stored number indicator 28 in front view. The payout number display 29 is provided for displaying the payout number of medals to be paid out according to the combination of symbols displayed on the active line. The payout number display 29 displays that the gaming machine 1 is in an error state when the gaming machine 1 is in an error state.

(Putable indicator lamp 30)
The insertable display lamp 30 is provided on the right side of the payout number indicator 29 in front view. Here, the main control board 300, which will be described later, performs a process of turning on the insertable display lamp 30 when accepting the insertion of medals through the medal insertion slot 6. On the other hand, when the medal insertion slot 6 does not accept the insertion of medals, the main control board 300 to be described later performs a process of turning off the insertable display lamp 30. As a result, the player is notified through the medal slot 6 whether or not to accept medal insertion.

(Replay display lamp 31)
The replay display lamp 31 is provided below the throwable display lamp 30. Here, the main control board 300 described later performs a process of turning on the replay display lamp 31 when a combination of symbols related to “replay” described later is displayed on the active line. On the other hand, the main control board 300 described later displays the symbol combination related to “replay” described later on the active line in the next game in which the symbol combination related to “replay” described later is displayed on the active line. If not, processing for turning off the replay display lamp 31 is performed. This notifies that the symbol combination related to “Replay” is displayed on the active line and that the next game can be performed without using a medal.

(Bonus display unit 32)
The Bonus display part 32 is provided on the right side of the display window 23 when viewed from the front. The Bonus display unit 32 is provided with an LED. Here, when a state managed by the later-described sub-control board 400 becomes a Bonus state, the later-described sub-control board 400 passes through a later-described panel LED relay board 700 and a later-described Bonus display LED board 705. Processing to turn on the LED provided in the Bonus display unit 32 is performed. On the other hand, the sub control board 400 described later turns off the LED provided on the Bonus display unit 32 via the panel LED relay board 700 described later and the Bonus display LED board 705 described later when the Bonus state described below ends. To perform the process. As a result, the player is notified of the transition to the Bonus state and the player is informed that the Bonus state has ended.

(ART display unit 33)
The ART display unit 33 is provided below the Bonus display unit 32. The ART display unit 33 is provided with an LED. Here, when a state managed by the later-described sub-control board 400 becomes an ART state, the later-described sub-control board 400 passes through a later-described panel LED relay board 700 and an later-described ART display LED board 706. Processing to turn on the LED provided in the ART display unit 33 is performed. On the other hand, the sub control board 400 described later turns off the LED provided on the ART display unit 33 via the panel LED relay board 700 described later and the ART display LED board 706 described later when the ART state described later ends. To perform the process. As a result, the player is notified that the ART state has been entered, and the player has been informed that the ART state has ended.

(RUSH display unit 34)
The RUSH display unit 34 is provided on the left side of the display window 23 when viewed from the front. The RUSH display unit 34 is provided with an LED. Here, the sub-control board 400 described later has a panel LED relay board 700 described later and a RUSH display LED board 707 described below when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 described below becomes the first addition state. The process of turning on the LED provided in the RUSH display unit 34 is performed. On the other hand, the sub-control board 400 described later is an LED provided in the RUSH display unit 34 via a panel LED relay board 700 described later and a RUSH display LED board 707 described later when the first addition state described below is completed. The process to turn off is performed. Thus, the player is notified that the player has shifted to the first added state and that the first added state has been completed to the player.

(Stop button operation display unit 35)
The stop button operation display unit 35 is provided below the RUSH display unit 34. (a) A left stop button operation display unit 35L that emits light at a timing when it is optimal to operate the left stop button 11, and (b) ) Middle stop button operation display unit 35C that emits light at a timing when it is optimal to operate the middle stop button 12, and (c) Right stop button operation display that emits light at a timing that is optimal to operate the right stop button 13 35R, and is provided to notify the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. Each of the left stop button operation display unit 35L, the middle stop button operation display unit 35C, and the right stop button operation display unit 35R is provided with an LED. Thereby, when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 described later is the ART state, the optimal operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is notified.

(Left stop button operation display part 35L)
The left stop button operation display part 35L is provided to notify that it is the optimal timing to operate the left stop button 11. Here, when a state managed by the later-described sub-control board 400 is the ART state, when the operation of the left stop button 11 is the optimal timing, the later-described sub-control board 400 is described later. A process of turning on an LED provided on the left stop button operation display unit 35L via the panel LED relay board 700 and a stop button operation LED board 708 described later is performed. On the other hand, the sub control board 400 to be described later performs a process of turning on the LED provided in the left stop button operation display unit 35L in the ART state to be described later, and then the operation of the left stop button 11 is performed. Then, a process of turning off the LED provided on the left stop button operation display unit 35L via a panel LED relay board 700 described later and a stop button operation LED board 708 described later is performed. This notifies that it is the optimal timing to operate the left stop button 11.

(Intermediate stop button operation display part 35C)
The middle stop button operation display section 35C is provided to notify that it is the optimal timing to operate the middle stop button 12. Here, when a state managed by the sub-control board 400 to be described later is the ART state, the sub-control board 400 to be described later will be described later when the operation of the middle stop button 12 is the optimal timing. A process of turning on an LED provided on the middle stop button operation display unit 35C via the panel LED relay board 700 and a stop button operation LED board 708 described later is performed. On the other hand, the sub-control board 400 described later performs the process of turning on the LED provided in the middle stop button operation display unit 35C in the later-described ART state, and then the operation of the middle stop button 12 is performed. Then, a process of turning off the LED provided on the middle stop button operation display unit 35C via a panel LED relay board 700 described later and a stop button operation LED board 708 described later is performed. This notifies that it is the optimal timing to operate the middle stop button 12.

(Right stop button operation display part 35R)
The right stop button operation display unit 35R is provided to notify that it is an optimal timing to operate the right stop button 13. Here, when a state managed by the below-described sub control board 400 is an ART state, when the right control button 400 is operated at an optimal timing, the below-described sub control board 400 is described later. A process of turning on an LED provided on the right stop button operation display unit 35R via the panel LED relay board 700 and a stop button operation LED board 708 described later is performed. On the other hand, the sub control board 400 to be described later performs a process of turning on the LED provided in the right stop button operation display unit 35R in the ART state to be described later, and then the operation of the right stop button 13 is performed. Then, a process of turning off the LED provided on the right stop button operation display unit 35R via a panel LED relay board 700 described later and a stop button operation LED board 708 described later is performed. This notifies that it is the optimal timing to operate the right stop button 13. Accordingly, when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 described later is the ART state, the optimal operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is notified.

(Start lever LED36)
The start lever LED 36 is provided inside the start lever 10. Here, the below-described sub control board 400 performs a process of turning on or blinking the start lever LED 36 via the below-described panel LED relay board 700 and the below-described start lever LED board 709 at a predetermined timing. As a result, it is possible to perform a visual appeal to the player.

(Lumbar panel 37)
The waist panel 37 is provided below the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, and is provided to allow the player to recognize the model name, motif, and the like of the gaming machine 1.

(Tray unit 38)
The saucer unit 38 is provided below the waist panel 37. Further, the tray unit 38 is provided for receiving and storing medals discharged from a medal payout port 39 which will be described later.

(Medal payout exit 39)
The medal payout opening 39 is provided below the waist panel 37 and is provided to discharge medals paid out by a hopper 202 described later when the medals are paid out. The medal payout port 39 is provided for discharging an improper medal when a selector sensor 15s described later determines that the medal inserted into the medal slot 6 is not an appropriate medal. Further, the medal payout opening 39 is inserted at a timing when it is impossible to accept the insertion of the medal when a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 at a timing when the medal insertion cannot be accepted. It is provided to eject medals.

(Upper left speaker 40)
The upper left speaker 40 is provided on the back side of the front door 3. The upper left speaker 40 is provided to output BGM, voice, sound effects, etc. when performing an effect.

(Lower left speaker 41)
The lower left speaker 41 is provided on the back side of the front door 3. The lower left speaker 41 is provided to output BGM, voice, sound effects, etc. when performing an effect.

(Upper right speaker 42)
The upper right speaker 42 is provided on the back side of the front door 3. The upper right speaker 42 is provided to output BGM, voice, sound effects, etc. when performing an effect.

(Lower right speaker 43)
The lower right speaker 43 is provided on the back side of the front door 3. The lower right speaker 43 is provided for outputting BGM, voice, sound effects, etc. when performing an effect.

(Setting display section 44)
The setting display unit 44 is provided on a main control board 300 which will be described later, and is provided for displaying a setting value of the gaming machine 1. Here, the main control board 300 described later is currently set when a setting change key (not shown) is inserted into a setting change key hole 48 described later and rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle. Processing for displaying the set value on the setting display unit 44 is performed.

(Setting change button 45)
The setting change button 45 is provided on a setting switch board 250 described later, and is provided to change a setting value. Here, the main control board 300, which will be described later, displays on the setting display unit 44 when an operation of the setting change button 45 is detected in a state where the currently set value is displayed on the setting display unit 44. A process of switching the displayed set value and displaying it is performed. The currently set value is displayed on the setting display unit 44 when a setting change key switch 49sw described later is turned on. Then, the main control board 300 described later performs a process of determining the set value when an operation of the start lever 10 is detected in a state where the currently set value is displayed on the setting display unit 44. . It should be noted that the main control board 300 to be described later performs a process of canceling the error based on the detection of the operation of the setting change button 45 when an error occurs in the gaming machine 1. In other words, in the present embodiment, the setting change button 45 has (a) a function for switching a setting value and (b) a function for canceling an error.

  In the present embodiment, the setting values are set in the “6” stage from the setting “1” to the setting “6”. For this reason, when the operation of the setting change button 45 is detected in a state where the information indicating that the setting is “1” is displayed on the setting display unit 44, the setting display unit 44 indicates that the setting is “2”. The information is displayed, and thereafter, every time the setting change button 45 is operated, the set value displayed on the setting display unit 44 is added and displayed by “1”. However, when the setting change button 45 is operated in the state where the information indicating that the setting is “6” is displayed on the setting display unit 44, the information indicating that the setting is “1” is displayed on the setting display unit 44. Will be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the setting values are set at the “6” stage from the setting “1” to the setting “6”. However, the setting value is not limited to this. For example, the set value may be the “2” stage, the “3” stage, the “4” stage, or the “5” stage.

(Liquid crystal display device 46)
The liquid crystal display device 46 is provided above the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20, and is provided for displaying moving images, still images, and the like. Here, when a state managed by the later-described sub-control board 400 is the ART state, the later-described sub-control board 400 performs “push order bells A1 to A4” or “push-order bells” by an internal lottery process described later. When any one of “B1 to B4” is determined, processing for displaying the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 on the liquid crystal display device 46 via the effect control board 600. Do.

(External concentration terminal board 47)
The external concentration terminal board 47 is provided on the lower right side of the setting switch board 250, which will be described later, and (a) the number of medals used in the game with respect to the outside of the gaming machine 1 such as a hall computer (not shown). (B) a medal payout signal that can specify the number of medals paid out to the player, and (c) a state managed by a sub-control board 400 described later has shifted to the ART state. (D) A Bonus state signal that can specify that a state managed by a sub-control board 400 described later has shifted to a Bonus state, and (e) A state-control signal that is managed by a sub-control board 400 described later. A first added state signal that can specify that the state has shifted to the first added state; and (f) a security signal that can specify that an illegal act has been performed. It is.

  More specifically, the “ART state signal” is a signal output when the state managed by the main control board 300 shifts to the fourth RT gaming state, and the “Bonus state signal” is This is a signal that is output when the state managed by the main control board 300 shifts to the third RT gaming state, and the “first added state signal” is the state that is managed by the main control board 300 changed to the fifth RT gaming state. It is a signal that is output when transitioned.

(Setting change keyhole 48)
The setting change keyhole 48 is provided on a setting switch board 250, which will be described later, and is provided to change a setting value. A setting change key switch 49sw (described later) detects that the setting change key hole 48 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle with a setting change key (not shown) inserted in the setting change key hole 48. Is provided.

(Director 50)
The effect device 50 is provided on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 46. Here, when it is determined that the effect device 50 can be moved, the sub control board 400 performs a process of moving the effect device 50 in the vertical direction via the effect control board 600 and the effect device drive board 650. Do. Thereby, the effect which appeals visually to a player can be performed.

(Status board 100)
The status board 100 is provided on the back side of the front door 3 and below the display window 23. The status board 100 also includes a BET switch 7sw described later, a MAXBET switch 8sw described later, a settlement switch 9sw described later, a start switch 10sw described later, a left stop switch 11sw described later, a middle stop switch 12sw described later, and a right stop described later. A switch 13sw, a selector sensor 15s, an error release sensor 16s, a door opening / closing sensor 17s, a start lamp 24, a first BET lamp 25, a second BET lamp 26, a third BET lamp 27, a stored number indicator 28, a payout number indicator 29, The throwable display lamp 30, the replay display lamp 31, and the main control board 300 are connected.

(Reel control board 150)
The reel control board 150 is provided above the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20, and is provided to control the rotation and stop of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. . The reel control board 150 includes a left stepping motor 151 to be described later, a middle stepping motor 152 to be described later, a right stepping motor 153 to be described later, a left reel sensor 154s to be described later, a middle reel sensor 155s to be described later, and a right reel sensor 156s to be described later. And the main control board 300 are connected.

(Left stepping motor 151)
The left stepping motor 151 is provided inside the left reel 18 and is provided for controlling the left reel 18. The left stepping motor 151 has a configuration capable of stopping the rotation shaft at a specified angle. As a result, the left reel 18 rotates at a constant angle each time a pulse signal is output to the left stepping motor 151. The main control board 300 manages the rotation angle of the left reel 18 by counting the number of times the pulse signal is output to the left stepping motor 151 after detecting the reel index.

(Medium stepping motor 152)
The middle stepping motor 152 is provided inside the middle reel 19 and is provided for controlling the middle reel 19. Further, the middle stepping motor 152 has a configuration capable of stopping the rotation axis at a specified angle. As a result, the intermediate reel 19 rotates at a constant angle each time a pulse signal is output to the intermediate stepping motor 152. The main control board 300 manages the rotation angle of the middle reel 19 by counting the number of times the pulse signal is output to the middle stepping motor 152 after detecting the reel index.

(Right stepping motor 153)
The right stepping motor 153 is provided inside the right reel 20 and is provided for controlling the right reel 20. The right stepping motor 153 has a configuration capable of stopping the rotation shaft at a specified angle. As a result, the right reel 20 rotates at a constant angle each time a pulse signal is output to the right stepping motor 153. The main control board 300 manages the rotation angle of the right reel 20 by counting the number of times the pulse signal is output to the right stepping motor 153 after detecting the reel index.

(Left reel sensor 154s)
The left reel sensor 154s is provided inside the left reel 18, and includes an optical sensor having a light emitting part and a light receiving part. The left reel sensor 154s is provided to detect a reel index indicating that the left reel 18 has rotated “1”.

(Medium reel sensor 155s)
The middle reel sensor 155s is provided inside the middle reel 19, and includes an optical sensor having a light emitting part and a light receiving part. The middle reel sensor 155s is provided to detect a reel index indicating that the middle reel 19 has rotated “1”.

(Right reel sensor 156s)
The right reel sensor 156s is provided inside the right reel 20, and includes an optical sensor having a light emitting part and a light receiving part. The right reel sensor 156s is provided to detect a reel index indicating that the right reel 20 has rotated “1”.

(Power supply board 200)
The power supply board 200 is provided inside the cabinet 2 on the left side when viewed from the front, and is provided for performing control for supplying power to the gaming machine 1. The power supply board 200 is connected with a power switch 201sw described later, a hopper 202 described later, an auxiliary storage sensor 203s described later, and a main control board 300.

(Power button 201)
The power button 201 is provided on the left side of a front view of a hopper 202 described later, and is provided for performing an operation of supplying power to the gaming machine 1.

(Hopper 202)
The hopper 202 is provided on the right side of the power supply board 200 as viewed from the front, and is provided for paying out medals to the player. Here, the main control board 300, which will be described later, performs a process of driving the hopper 202 via the power supply board 200 when a combination of symbols for paying out medals is displayed on the active line. Process to pay out.

(Auxiliary storage 203)
The auxiliary storage 203 is provided on the right side of the hopper 202 as viewed from the front, and is provided to store the overflowing medals when the medals stored in the hopper 202 overflow.

(Setting switch board 250)
The setting switch board 250 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and on the upper right side of the cabinet 2 when viewed from the front. The setting switch board 250 is connected to a setting change switch 45sw described later and a setting change key switch 49sw described later.

(Main control board 300)
The main control board 300 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and on the left side of the setting switch board 250 when viewed from the front, and is provided for controlling the gaming machine 1. The main control board 300 includes a main CPU 301 described later, a main ROM 302 described later, a main RAM 303 described later, and a main random number generator 304 described later. Further, the main control board 300 is connected with a setting display section 44, an external concentration terminal board 47, a status board 100, a reel control board 150, a power supply board 200, a setting switch board 250, and a sub control board 400 described later.

(Sub control board 400)
The sub-control board 400 is provided on the left side of the main control board 300 when viewed from the front, and is provided mainly for controlling the production. The sub control board 400 includes a sub CPU 401 described later, a sub ROM 402 described later, a sub RAM 403 described later, and a sub random number generator 404 described later. Further, the main control board 300, a backlight relay board 450 described later, an effect control board 600 described later, and a panel LED relay board 700 described later are connected to the sub control board 400.

(Backlight relay board 450)
The backlight relay board 450 is provided below the main control board 300, and relays between the sub control board 400, a left backlight board 451 described later, a middle backlight board 452 described later, and a right backlight board 453 described later. Is provided to do. In addition, a sub-control board 400, a later-described left backlight board 451, a later-described middle backlight board 452, and a later-described right backlight board 453 are connected to the backlight relay board 450.

(Left backlight substrate 451)
The left backlight substrate 451 is provided inside the left reel 18 and is connected to a left backlight 461 described later. Further, the left backlight substrate 451 is provided for performing light emission control of the left backlight 461 described later from the sub control substrate 400 via the backlight relay substrate 450.

  In FIG. 2, a left stepping motor 151, a middle stepping motor 152, a right stepping motor 153, a left reel sensor 154s, a middle reel sensor 155s, a right reel sensor 156s, a left backlight board 451, a middle backlight board 452, and a right In order to describe the backlight substrate 453, illustration of sheets mounted on the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is omitted.

(Medium backlight substrate 452)
The middle backlight substrate 452 is provided inside the middle reel 19 and is connected to a middle backlight 462 described later. The middle backlight board 452 is provided for performing light emission control of the middle backlight 462, which will be described later, from the sub control board 400 via the backlight relay board 450.

(Right backlight substrate 453)
The right backlight substrate 453 is provided inside the right reel 20, and a right backlight 463 described later is connected thereto. Further, the right backlight substrate 453 is provided for performing light emission control of the right backlight 463 described later from the sub control substrate 400 via the backlight relay substrate 450.

(Amplifier board 500)
The amplifier board 500 is provided above the upper left speaker 40 and outputs BGM data, audio data, sound effect data, and the like from the upper left speaker 40, the lower left speaker 41, the upper right speaker 42, and the lower right speaker 43. It is provided to perform control. In addition, an upper left speaker 40, a lower left speaker 41, an upper right speaker 42, a lower right speaker 43, and an effect control board 600 described later are connected to the amplifier board 500.

(Production control board 600)
The effect control board 600 is provided above the back surface of the front door 3 and is provided mainly for executing an effect. The effect control board 600 includes a liquid crystal control CPU 601 described later, a liquid crystal control ROM 602 described later, a liquid crystal control RAM 603 described later, a CGROM 604 described later, a sound source IC 605 described later, a sound source ROM 606 described later, and a VDP 607 described later. Further, the effect control board 600 is connected to a liquid crystal display device 46, an amplifier board 500, and an effect device drive board 650 described later.

(Director drive board 650)
The effect device drive board 650 is provided below an effect device drive relay board 750, which will be described later, and is provided for performing control to move the effect device 50. The effect device drive board 650 includes an effect device 50, an effect control board 600, a left effect device motor 651, which will be described later, an upper left effect device sensor 652s, which will be described later, a lower left effect device sensor 653s, which will be described later, and a right effect device motor 654, which will be described later. , Later described upper right effect device sensor 655s, later described lower right effect device sensor 656s, later described left liquid crystal lift motor 657, later described upper left liquid crystal lift sensor 658s, later described lower left liquid crystal lift sensor 659s, later described right liquid crystal lift motor 660, An upper right liquid crystal lift sensor 661s, which will be described later, a lower right liquid crystal lift sensor 662s, which will be described later, and an effect device drive relay board 750, which will be described later, are connected.

(Comparator LED relay board 700)
The panel LED relay board 700 is provided above the lower left speaker 41. The sub-control board 400, a MAXBET button LED board 701 described later, a stop button LED board 702 described later, an effect button LED board 703 described later, Lumbar panel LED substrate 704, Bonus display LED substrate 705 described later, ART display LED substrate 706 described later, RUSH display LED substrate 707 described later, stop button operation LED substrate 708 described later, start lever LED substrate 709 described later, described later An effect button sensor 710s is provided to relay a cross key substrate 711, which will be described later. The panel LED relay board 700 includes a sub control board 400, a MAXBET button LED board 701, which will be described later, a stop button LED board 702, which will be described later, an effect button LED board 703, which will be described later, a waist panel LED board 704, which will be described later. Bonus display LED board 705, later-described ART display LED board 706, later-described RUSH display LED board 707, later-described stop button operation LED board 708, later-described start lever LED board 709, later-described effect button sensor 710s, later-described cross key A substrate 711 is connected.

(Director drive relay board 750)
The effect device drive relay board 750 is provided above the effect control board 600, and is provided to relay the effect device drive board 650, the effect device control board 800 described later, and the LED control board 850 described later. . The effect device drive relay board 750 is connected to an effect device drive board 650, an effect device control board 800 described later, and an LED control board 850 described later.

(Top LED board 851)
The top LED board 851 is provided above the effect control board 600 and is provided to control the top LED 861 described later. The top LED board 851 is connected to a top LED 861 described later.

(Corner LED board 852)
The corner LED boards 852 are provided on the left and right sides of the rendering device drive relay board 750, and are provided for controlling the corner LEDs 862 described later. The corner LED substrate 852 is connected to a corner LED 862 described later.

(Side LED board 853)
The side LED boards 853 are provided on the back side of the front door 3 and on both the left and right sides of the display window 23, and are provided to control the side LEDs 863 described later. Further, a side LED 863 described later is connected to the side LED substrate 853.

(Tray side LED board 854)
The saucer side LED board 854 is provided on the back side of the front door 3, outside the left lower speaker 41 and outside the right lower speaker 43, and is provided to control a saucer side LED 864 described later. ing. In addition, a saucer side LED 864 described later is connected to the saucer side LED substrate 854.

(Receiver LED board 855)
The saucer LED substrate 855 is provided on the back side of the front door 3 and on the back side of the saucer unit 38, and is provided to control a saucer LED 865 described later. In addition, a tray LED 865 described later is connected to the tray LED substrate 855.

(Top LED861)
The top LED 861 is provided above the liquid crystal display device 46. Further, the top LED 861 is designed and designed with a shape, color, pattern, pattern and the like appealing to the player's vision. Here, the sub control board 400 performs a process of turning on and blinking the top LED 861 via the effect control board 600, the effect device drive board 650, the effect device drive relay board 750, and the top LED board 851. Thereby, the effect which appeals visually to a player can be performed.

(Corner LED 862)
The corner LEDs 862 are provided on both the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 46. In addition, the corner LED 862 is designed and designed with shapes, colors, patterns, patterns, etc. appealing to the player's vision. Here, the sub control board 400 performs a process of lighting and blinking the corner LED 862 via the effect control board 600, the effect device drive board 650, the effect device drive relay board 750, and the corner LED board 852. Thereby, the effect which appeals visually to a player can be performed.

(Side LED 863)
The side LEDs 863 are provided at the left and right ends of the gaming machine 1. The side LED 863 is designed and designed with shapes, colors, patterns, patterns, etc. appealing to the player's vision. Here, the sub control board 400 performs a process of lighting and blinking the side LED 863 via the effect control board 600, the effect device drive board 650, the effect device drive relay board 750, and the side LED board 853. Thereby, the effect which appeals visually to a player can be performed.

(Tray side LED864)
The saucer side LED 864 is provided below the side LED 863. In addition, the tray side LED 864 is designed and designed with shapes, colors, patterns, patterns, etc. appealing to the player's vision. Here, the sub control board 400 performs a process of lighting and blinking the saucer side LED 864 via the effect control board 600, the effect device drive board 650, the effect device drive relay board 750, and the saucer side LED board 854. Thereby, the effect which appeals visually to a player can be performed.

(Tray LED 865)
The saucer LED 865 is provided on the front side of the saucer unit 38 in front view. In addition, the tray LED 865 is designed and designed with shapes, colors, patterns, patterns, etc. appealing to the player's vision. Here, the sub control board 400 performs a process of lighting and blinking the saucer LED 865 via the effect control board 600, the effect device drive board 650, the effect device drive relay board 750, and the saucer LED board 855. Thereby, the effect which appeals visually to a player can be performed.

(Block diagram of the entire gaming machine)
Next, a block diagram of the entire gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the gaming machine 1, a status board 100, a reel control board 150, a power board 200, a setting switch board 250, and a sub control board 400 are connected to a main control board 300 that controls main operations of the gaming machine 1.

(BET switch 7sw)
The BET switch 7sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the BET button 7. Here, the status board 100 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when an operation of the BET button 7 is detected by the BET switch 7sw. The main control board 300 performs a process of using “1” medals from the stored (credit) medals based on the reception of the predetermined signal from the status board 100.

(MAXBET switch 8sw)
The MAXBET switch 8sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the MAXBET button 8. Here, when the operation of the MAXBET button 8 is detected by the MAXBET switch 8sw, the status board 100 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300. The main control board 300 performs processing of using “3” medals from the stored (credit) medals based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the status board 100.

(Settlement switch 9sw)
The settlement switch 9sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the settlement button 9. Here, the status board 100 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when an operation of the payment button 9 is detected by the payment switch 9sw. Then, the main control board 300 performs a process of adjusting the stored medals based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the status board 100. Specifically, the main control board 300 transmits a signal to the effect that the stored medals are returned to the power supply board 200. Then, the power supply substrate 200 performs a process of returning the stored medals by driving the hopper 202.

(Start switch 10sw)
The start switch 10sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the start lever 10. Here, the status board 100 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when an operation of the start lever 10 is detected by the start switch 10sw. The main control board 300 performs processing for starting rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the status board 100.

(Left stop switch 11sw)
The left stop switch 11sw is a switch for detecting an operation of the left stop button 11. Here, the status board 100 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when the operation of the left stop button 11 is detected by the left stop switch 11sw. The main control board 300 performs a process of stopping the rotating left reel 18 based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the status board 100.

(Intermediate stop switch 12sw)
The middle stop switch 12sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the middle stop button 12. Here, the status board 100 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when the operation of the middle stop button 12 is detected by the middle stop switch 12sw. The main control board 300 performs a process of stopping the rotating middle reel 19 based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the status board 100.

(Right stop switch 13sw)
The right stop switch 13sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the right stop button 13. Here, the status board 100 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when the operation of the right stop button 13 is detected by the right stop switch 13sw. The main control board 300 performs a process of stopping the rotating right reel 20 based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the status board 100.

(Selector sensor 15s)
The selector sensor 15 s is a sensor for detecting that an appropriate medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 6. Here, the status board 100 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when the selector sensor 15s detects the passage of a normal medal. Then, the main control board 300, based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the status board 100, (a) a process of adding “1” to the number of medals to be stored (credited) or (b) used for a game A process of adding “1” to the number of medals to be performed is performed.

(Setting change switch 45sw)
The setting change switch 45sw is a switch for detecting an operation of the setting change button 45. Here, the setting switch board 250 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when the operation of the setting change button 45 is detected by the setting change switch 45sw. Then, the main control board 300 performs a process of updating and displaying the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 44 based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the setting switch board 250.

(Setting change key switch 49sw)
The setting change key switch 49sw is a switch for detecting that a setting change key (not shown) is rotated by a predetermined angle in a state where the setting change key (not shown) is inserted into the setting change key hole 48. Here, when it is detected that the setting switch board 250 is rotated by a predetermined angle with a setting change key (not shown) being inserted into the setting change key hole 48, the setting switch board 250 is connected to the main control board 300. To transmit a predetermined signal. Then, the main control board 300 performs a process of displaying the current setting value on the setting display unit 44 based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the setting switch board 250.

(Power switch 201sw)
The power switch 201sw is a switch for detecting an operation of the power button 201. Here, the power supply board 200 performs a process of supplying power to the gaming machine 1 when the operation of the power button 201 is detected by the power switch 201sw.

(Auxiliary storage sensor 203s)
The auxiliary storage sensor 203s is a sensor for detecting that medals stored in the auxiliary storage 203 are full. Here, the power supply board 200 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when the auxiliary storage sensor 203s detects that the medals stored in the auxiliary storage 203 are full. . The main control board 300 performs error processing when the medals stored in the auxiliary storage 203 are full based on receiving a predetermined signal from the power supply board 200.

(Main CPU 301)
The main CPU 301 is provided on the main control board 300. Further, the main CPU 301 reads a program stored in a main ROM 302, which will be described later, and performs a predetermined arithmetic process in accordance with the progress of the game, so that the status board 100, the reel control board 150, the power board 200, and the sub control board. A predetermined signal is transmitted to 400.

(Main ROM 302)
The main ROM 302 is provided on the main control board 300. The main ROM 302 is provided for storing a control program executed by the main CPU 301, a data table, data for transmitting a command to the sub control board 400, and the like. Specifically, the main ROM 302 includes an array data table (see FIG. 6) described later, a symbol combination table (see FIG. 7) whose symbol combination group is described later (see FIG. 7), and a symbol whose group combination group is “01”. A combination table (see FIG. 8), a symbol combination table (see FIG. 9) whose symbol combination group described below is “02”, a symbol combination table (see FIG. 10) whose symbol combination group is “03”, and a symbol combination described below A symbol combination table (see FIG. 11) whose group is “04”, a first winning combination determination table for a non-RT gaming state described later (see FIG. 13), and a first winning combination determination table for a first RT gaming state described later (FIG. 14). 2) a first winning combination determination table for a second RT gaming state (see FIG. 15), which will be described later, and a first winning combination determination table for a third RT gaming state, which will be described later (see FIG. 16). ), A first winning combination determination table for a 4RT gaming state described later (see FIG. 17), a first winning combination determination table for a fifth RT gaming state described later (see FIG. 18), and a first winning combination for a sixth RT gaming state described later. A combination determination table (see FIG. 19), a second winning combination determination table (see FIG. 20) described later, and the like are stored.

(Main RAM 303)
The main RAM 303 is provided on the main control board 300. The main RAM 303 is provided for storing various data determined by the execution of the program by the main CPU 301. Specifically, the main RAM 303 is provided with various storage areas such as various counters such as an insertion number counter and a setting change device operation abnormality flag storage area.

(Main random number generator 304)
The main random number generator 304 is provided on the main control board 300. The main random number generator 304 is provided for generating a random number used in a lottery or the like for determining a winning combination. Here, in the present embodiment, the main random number generator 304 generates a random number value in the range of “0” to “65535”.

(Sub CPU 401)
The sub CPU 401 is provided on the sub control board 400. In addition, the sub CPU 401 reads a program stored in a sub ROM 402 described later, and is predetermined based on information on a command received from the main control board 300, a signal input from the effect button sensor 710s and the cross key board 711. And the result of the calculation is provided to the effect control board 600, the amplifier board 500, and the like.

(Sub ROM 402)
The sub ROM 402 is provided on the sub control board 400. The sub ROM 402 is provided for storing a control program executed by the sub CPU 401, a data table, and the like. Specifically, the sub ROM 402 has an effect determination table (see FIG. 24) described later, a bonus preparation state shift lottery table (see FIG. 25) described later, a bonus state distribution lottery table (see FIG. 26) described later, and a later-described Predictor game number determination table (see FIG. 27), chance state transition lottery table (see FIG. 28) described later, fake game number determination table (see FIG. 29) described later, promotion lottery table (see FIG. 30) described later, and ART ready state transition lottery table (see FIG. 31), ART state game number extra lottery table (see FIG. 32), pull-out lottery table (see FIG. 33), and additional state transition lottery table (see FIG. 34). Etc.) are stored.

(Sub RAM 403)
The sub RAM 403 is provided on the sub control board 400. The sub RAM 403 is provided for storing various data determined by the execution of the program by the sub CPU 401. Specifically, the sub RAM 403 is provided with various counters such as a Bonus precursor state game number counter and various storage areas such as a state storage area.

(Sub-random number generator 404)
The sub random number generator 404 is provided on the sub control board 400. The sub-random number generator 404 is provided for generating a random number used in a lottery or the like for determining the production. Here, in the present embodiment, the sub-random number generator 404 generates a random value in the range of “0” to “65535”.

(Left backlight 461)
The left backlight 461 is provided on the left backlight substrate 451 and includes a plurality of LEDs. Here, the sub control board 400 performs a process of causing the left backlight 461 to emit light via the backlight relay board 450 and the left backlight board 451. Thereby, the visual recognition of the symbol of the left reel 18 becomes easy.

(Medium backlight 462)
The middle backlight 462 is provided on the middle backlight substrate 452 and includes a plurality of LEDs. Here, the sub-control board 400 performs a process of causing the middle backlight 462 to emit light via the backlight relay board 450 and the middle backlight board 452. Thereby, the visual recognition of the design of the middle reel 19 is facilitated.

(Right backlight 463)
The right backlight 463 is provided on the right backlight substrate 453 and includes a plurality of LEDs. Here, the sub-control board 400 performs a process of causing the right backlight 463 to emit light via the backlight relay board 450 and the right backlight board 453. Thereby, the visual recognition of the design of the right reel 20 is facilitated.

(LCD control CPU 601)
The liquid crystal control CPU 601 is provided on the effect control board 600. The liquid crystal control CPU 601 is provided for reading a program stored in a liquid crystal control ROM 602 described later and creating a display list based on a signal received from the sub control board 400. The liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs control to display image data stored in a CGROM 604 described later on the liquid crystal display device 46.

(LCD control ROM 602)
The liquid crystal control ROM 602 is provided on the effect control board 600. The liquid crystal control ROM 602 is provided to store a control program executed by the liquid crystal control CPU 601, a data table, and the like. Specifically, the liquid crystal control ROM 602 includes a control processing program of the liquid crystal control CPU 601, a display list generation program for generating a display list, a combination of animation scenes that are referred to when displaying an animation, and an animation scene display order. A weight frame indicating an image display time, various target data such as a sprite identification number and a transfer source address, various parameters such as a sprite display position and a transfer destination address, a drawing method, and the like are stored.

(Liquid crystal control RAM 603)
The liquid crystal control RAM 603 is provided on the effect control board 600. The liquid crystal control RAM 603 functions as a data work area when the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs arithmetic processing, and is provided to temporarily store data read from the liquid crystal control ROM 602. Further, for example, the liquid crystal control RAM 603 stores channel information for grasping audio data output from each channel of a speaker (upper left speaker 40, lower left speaker 41, upper right speaker 42, lower right speaker 43). An area is provided. This channel information storage area is provided with a storage area for a channel state management map, which will be described later, and further stores an output target empty channel, an output stop target channel, an output stopped channel, etc. used for searching for an empty channel or a stopped channel. An area is also provided.

(CGROM604)
The CGROM 604 is provided on the effect control board 600. The CGROM 604 includes color number information for specifying a color number for each pixel in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, “32” pixels × “32” pixels) and an α value indicating the transparency of the image. It is provided for compressing and storing image data comprising a set.

(Sound source IC 605)
The sound source IC 605 is provided on the effect control board 600. The sound source IC 605 reads a program and data related to sound stored in a sound source ROM 606, which will be described later, and generates sound signals for driving the upper left speaker 40, lower left speaker 41, upper right speaker 42, and lower right speaker 43. It is provided for.

(Sound source ROM 606)
The sound source ROM 606 is provided on the effect control board 600. The sound source ROM 606 is provided for storing a program, data, and the like related to a sound output when performing an effect. The sound source ROM 606 stores the output priority of the audio data and the reproduction time together with the audio data for production.

(VDP607)
The VDP 607 is a so-called image processor, and controls to read image data from the “display frame buffer area” out of the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area based on an instruction from the liquid crystal control CPU 601. Then, based on the read image data, a video signal (for example, an LVDS signal or an RGB signal) is generated, and thereby control for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 46 is performed. The VDP 607 includes a control register (not shown), a CG bus interface, a CPU interface, a clock generation circuit, an expansion circuit, a drawing circuit, a display circuit, a memory controller, and the like, which are connected by a bus.

(Left rendering device motor 651)
The left effect device motor 651 is connected to the effect device drive board 650. The left effect device motor 651 is provided to move the effect device 50 in the vertical direction together with a later-described right effect device motor 654.

(Upper left rendering device sensor 652s)
The upper left rendering device sensor 652s is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. The upper left effect device sensor 652s is provided together with an upper right effect device sensor 655s, which will be described later, to detect that the effect device 50 has moved to a predetermined position when the effect device 50 is moved upward. .

(Lower left rendering device sensor 653s)
The lower left rendering device sensor 653s is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. Also, the lower left effect device sensor 653s is provided together with the lower right effect device sensor 656s described later to detect that the effect device 50 has moved to a predetermined position when the effect device 50 is moved downward. Yes.

(Right effect device motor 654)
The right effect device motor 654 is connected to the effect device drive board 650. The right effect device motor 654 is provided together with the left effect device motor 651 to move the effect device 50 in the vertical direction.

(Upper right rendering device sensor 655s)
The upper right rendering device sensor 655s is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. The upper right effect device sensor 655s is provided together with the upper left effect device sensor 652s to detect that the effect device 50 has moved to a predetermined position when the effect device 50 is moved upward.

(Lower right rendering device sensor 656s)
The lower right rendering device sensor 656s is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. The lower right effect device sensor 656s is provided together with the lower left effect device sensor 653s to detect that the effect device 50 has moved to a predetermined position when the effect device 50 is moved downward.

(Left LCD lift motor 657)
The left liquid crystal lift motor 657 is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. The left liquid crystal lifting / lowering motor 657 is provided to move the liquid crystal display device 46 in the vertical direction together with the right liquid crystal lifting / lowering motor 660 described later.

(Upper left LCD lift sensor 658s)
The upper left liquid crystal lift sensor 658s is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. The upper left liquid crystal lift sensor 658s is provided together with an upper right liquid crystal lift sensor 661s described later to detect that the liquid crystal display device 46 has moved to a predetermined position when the liquid crystal display device 46 is moved upward. ing.

(Lower left LCD lift sensor 659s)
The lower left liquid crystal lift sensor 659s is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. The lower left liquid crystal lift sensor 659s is provided together with the lower right liquid crystal lift sensor 662s, which will be described later, to detect that the liquid crystal display device 46 has moved to a predetermined position when the liquid crystal display device 46 is moved downward. It has been.

(Right LCD lift motor 660)
The right liquid crystal lift motor 660 is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. The right liquid crystal lifting / lowering motor 660 is provided together with the left liquid crystal lifting / lowering motor 657 to move the liquid crystal display device 46 in the vertical direction.

(Upper right LCD lift sensor 661s)
The upper right liquid crystal lift sensor 661s is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. The upper right liquid crystal lift sensor 661s is provided together with the upper left liquid crystal lift sensor 658s to detect that the liquid crystal display device 46 has moved to a predetermined position when the liquid crystal display device 46 is moved upward. .

(Lower right LCD lift sensor 662s)
The lower right liquid crystal lift sensor 662s is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. The lower right liquid crystal lift sensor 662s is provided together with the lower left liquid crystal lift sensor 659s to detect that the liquid crystal display device 46 has moved to a predetermined position when the liquid crystal display device 46 is moved downward. Yes.

(MAXBET button LED board 701)
The MAXBET button LED substrate 701 is connected to a MAXBET button LED 721 described later, and is provided for performing processing of emitting a MAXBET button LED 721 described later. Here, when the operation of the MAXBET button 8 is valid, the sub-control board 400 performs a process of emitting a later-described MAXBET button LED 721 via the MAXBET button LED board 701 of the panel LED relay board 700. Thereby, notification that the operation of the MAXBET button 8 is effective is performed.

(Stop button LED board 702)
A stop button LED board 702 is connected to a stop button LED 722 to be described later, and is provided for performing a process of emitting light to a stop button LED 722 to be described later. Here, the sub-control board 400 performs a process of emitting a stop button LED 722 to be described later via the stop button LED board 702 of the panel LED relay board 700. Specifically, the sub control board 400 emits a stop button LED 722 (described later) provided inside the left stop button 11 via the stop button LED board 702 when the left stop button 11 is valid. When the middle stop button 12 is valid, a stop button LED 722 (described later) provided inside the middle stop button 12 is emitted via the stop button LED board 702, and the right stop button 13 is valid. In some cases, a process for emitting a later-described stop button LED 722 provided inside the right stop button 13 through the stop button LED substrate 702 is performed. Thereby, notification that the operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is effective is performed.

(Production button LED board 703)
The effect button LED board 703 is connected to an effect button LED 723 described later, and is provided for performing processing of emitting an effect button LED 723 described later. Here, when the operation of the effect button 21 is valid, the sub control board 400 performs a process of emitting an effect button LED 723 described later via the effect button LED board 703 of the panel LED relay board 700. Thereby, it is notified that the operation of the effect button 21 is effective.

(Lumbar panel LED substrate 704)
A waist panel LED substrate 704 is connected to a waist panel LED 724 described later, and is provided to perform a process of emitting light from a waist panel LED 724 described later. Here, the sub-control board 400 performs a process of emitting a below-described waist panel LED 724 via the waist panel LED board 704 of the panel LED relay board 700. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the model name, motif, and the like of the gaming machine 1 drawn on the waist panel.

(Bonus display LED substrate 705)
The Bonus display LED substrate 705 is connected to the Bonus display unit 32 and is provided for performing a process of emitting light from the LED provided in the Bonus display unit 32. Here, the sub control board 400 is provided in the Bonus display unit 32 via the Bonus display LED board 705 of the panel LED relay board 700 at a timing when the state managed by the sub control board 400 shifts to the Bonus state. A process of emitting light from the LED is performed. Thereby, it notifies that it changed into the below-mentioned Bonus state.

(ART display LED substrate 706)
The ART display LED substrate 706 is connected to the ART display unit 33, and is provided for performing a process of emitting light from the LED provided in the ART display unit 33. Here, the sub control board 400 is provided in the ART display unit 33 via the ART display LED board 706 of the panel LED relay board 700 at a timing when the state managed by the sub control board 400 shifts to the ART state. A process of emitting light from the LED is performed. Thereby, it notifies that it changed to the below-mentioned ART state.

(RUSH display LED substrate 707)
The RUSH display LED substrate 707 is connected to the RUSH display unit 34 and is provided for performing a process of emitting light from the LED provided in the RUSH display unit 34. Here, the sub control board 400 is provided in the RUSH display unit 34 via the RUSH display LED board 707 of the panel LED relay board 700 at a timing when the state managed by the sub control board 400 shifts to the first addition state. The process which light-emits LED which is lighted is performed. Thereby, it notifies that it changed to the below-mentioned 1st addition state.

(Stop button operation LED board 708)
The stop button operation LED board 708 is connected to the stop button operation display unit 35 and is provided for performing a process of emitting light from the LED provided in the stop button operation display unit 35. Here, the sub control board 400 performs a process of emitting light emitted from the LEDs provided in the stop button operation display unit 35 via the stop button operation LED board 708 of the panel LED relay board 700. Specifically, when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is an ART state described later, the sub-control board 400 displays the panel LED when it is the optimal timing to operate the left stop button 11. If it is the optimal timing to light the LED provided on the left stop button operation display unit 35L and operate the middle stop button 12 via the stop button operation LED board 708 of the relay board 700, the control panel When it is the optimal timing to turn on the LED provided in the middle stop button operation display part 35C and operate the right stop button 13 via the stop button operation LED board 708 of the LED relay board 700, Through the stop button operation LED board 708 of the panel LED relay board 700, the right stop button operation display unit 35R is displayed. The process of lighting the vignetting in which LED performs. Thereby, the optimal operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is notified.

(Start lever LED board 709)
The start lever LED substrate 709 is connected to the start lever LED 36 and is provided for performing a process of emitting light from the start lever LED 36. Here, the sub control board 400 performs a process of emitting light from the start lever LED 36 at a predetermined timing via the start lever LED board 709 of the panel LED relay board 700. Thereby, an effect appealing visually to the player is performed.

(Direction button sensor 710s)
The effect button sensor 710 s is connected to the effect button 21 and is provided to detect the operation of the effect button 21. Here, the effect button sensor 710 s transmits a predetermined signal to the sub control board 400 based on the detection of the operation of the effect button 21. Then, the sub-control board 400 performs processing when the effect button 21 is operated based on the reception of the predetermined signal.

(Cross key board 711)
The cross key board 711 is connected to the cross key 22 and is provided to detect the operation of the cross key 22. Here, the cross key board 711 transmits a predetermined signal to the sub-control board 400 based on the detection of the operation of the cross key 22. Then, the sub control board 400 performs processing when the cross key 22 is operated based on the reception of the predetermined signal.

(MAX BET button LED721)
The MAXBET button LED 721 is provided inside the MAXBET button 8 and is connected to the MAXBET button LED board 701. Here, the MAXBET button LED 721 is turned on when it is time to accept the operation of the MAXBET button 8, and is turned off when it is time to accept the operation of the MAXBET button 8. Thereby, it is notified that it is the timing to accept the operation of the MAXBET button 8 and the timing to accept the operation of the MAXBET button 8.

(Stop button LED722)
The stop button LED 722 includes (a) a left stop button LED provided in the left stop button 11, (b) a middle stop button LED provided in the middle stop button 12, and (c) a right stop. A right stop button LED provided inside the button 13 is provided. Here, the left stop button LED is provided to notify that it is time to accept the operation of the left stop button 11, and the middle stop button LED is time to accept the operation of the middle stop button 12. The right stop button LED is provided to notify that it is time to accept the operation of the right stop button 13. Specifically, the left stop button LED, middle stop button LED, and right stop button LED are lit when it is time to accept the operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, and the left stop button is turned on. When it is time to not accept the operation of the button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, the light is turned off. Accordingly, (a) it is time to accept operations of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, and (b) operations of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are performed. Notification is made that it is a timing not to accept.

(Direction button LED723)
The effect button LED 723 is provided to notify that it is time to accept the operation of the effect button 21. Specifically, the effect button LED 723 is turned on when it is time to accept the operation of the effect button 21, and is turned off when it is time to not accept the operation of the effect button 21. Thereby, (a) it is the timing which receives operation of the production button 21, and (b) it is alert | reported that it is timing which does not receive operation of the production button 21. FIG.

(Lumbar panel LED724)
The waist panel LED 724 is provided to make it easier for the player to recognize the model name, motif, and the like of the gaming machine 1 drawn on the waist panel 37. Here, the waist panel LED 724 is lit when power is supplied to the gaming machine 1. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the model name, motif, etc. of the gaming machine 1 drawn on the waist panel 37. Note that the lumbar panel LED 724 may be turned off based on the fact that a predetermined condition has been satisfied. Thereby, it can be notified to the player that a predetermined condition has been satisfied.

(Production device control board 800)
The effect device control board 800 is provided to control an upper left effect device 811 described later, a lower left effect device 812 described later, an upper right effect device 813 described later, and a lower right effect device 814 described later. The effect device control board 800 is connected to the effect device drive relay board 750, the upper left effect device board 801, the lower left effect device board 802, the upper right effect device board 803, and the lower right effect device board 804.

(Upper left rendering device substrate 801)
An upper left effect device substrate 801 is connected to an upper left effect device 811 described later, and is provided to emit an LED provided in the upper left effect device 811 described later. Here, the sub control board 400 is provided in an upper left effect apparatus 811 described later via an effect control board 600, an effect apparatus drive board 650, an effect apparatus drive relay board 750, an effect apparatus control board 800, and an upper left effect apparatus board 801. The process which light-emits LED which is lighted is performed. Thereby, an effect appealing visually to the player is performed.

(Lower left rendering device board 802)
The lower left effect device substrate 802 is connected to a lower left effect device 812, which will be described later, and is provided to emit an LED provided in the lower left effect device 812, which will be described later. Here, the sub control board 400 is provided in the lower left effect device 812 described later via the effect control substrate 600, the effect device drive board 650, the effect device drive relay board 750, the effect device control board 800, and the lower left effect device board 802. The process which light-emits LED which is lighted is performed. Thereby, an effect appealing visually to the player is performed.

(Upper right rendering device board 803)
The upper right effect device substrate 803 is connected to an upper right effect device 813, which will be described later, and is provided to emit an LED provided in the upper right effect device 813, which will be described later. Here, the sub control board 400 is provided in an upper right effect device 813 described later via an effect control substrate 600, an effect device drive board 650, an effect device drive relay board 750, an effect device control board 800, and an upper right effect device board 803. The process which light-emits LED which performs is performed. Thereby, an effect appealing visually to the player is performed.

(Lower right rendering device board 804)
A lower right effect device substrate 804 is connected to a lower right effect device 814, which will be described later, and is provided to emit an LED provided in the lower right effect device 814, which will be described later. Here, the sub-control board 400 is transferred to the lower right effect device 814 (described later) via the effect control substrate 600, the effect device drive board 650, the effect device drive relay board 750, the effect device control board 800, and the lower right effect device board 804. The process which light-emits LED provided is performed. Thereby, an effect appealing visually to the player is performed.

(Upper left rendering device 811)
The upper left rendering device 811 is provided on the back side of the rendering device 50 and is connected to the upper left rendering device substrate 801. In addition, the upper left rendering device 811 has a built-in LED, and the LED built in the upper left rendering device 811 emits light when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

(Lower left rendering device 812)
The lower left rendering device 812 is provided on the back side of the rendering device 50 and is connected to the lower left rendering device substrate 802. In addition, the lower left rendering device 812 has a built-in LED, and the LED built in the lower left rendering device 812 emits light when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

(Upper right rendering device 813)
The upper right effect device 813 is provided on the back side of the effect device 50 and is connected to the upper right effect device substrate 803. Further, the upper right rendering device 813 has a built-in LED, and the LED built in the upper right rendering device 813 emits light when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

(Lower right rendering device 814)
The lower right rendering device 814 is provided on the back side of the rendering device 50 and is connected to the lower right rendering device substrate 804. Also, the lower right rendering device 814 has a built-in LED, and the LED built in the lower right rendering device 814 emits light when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

(LED control board 850)
The LED control board 850 is provided to control the top LED 861, the corner LED 862, the side LED 863, the saucer side LED 864, and the saucer LED 865. The LED control board 850 is connected to a top LED board 851, a corner LED board 852, a side LED board 853, a saucer side LED board 854, and a saucer LED board 855.

(Moving aspect of the rendering device 50)
Next, the movable aspect of the rendering device 50 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the rendering device 50 includes a base portion 51, a handle portion 52, and a sheath portion 53.

(Base part 51)
The base portion 51 is a member that becomes the base of the effect device 50, and has a built-in LED in a portion covered with the handle portion 52 and the sheath portion 53. Here, the sub-control board 400 performs a process of causing the LED built in the base unit 51 to emit light via the effect control board 600 and the effect device drive board 650 when executing a predetermined effect. In addition, an upper left effect device 811, a lower left effect device 812, an upper right effect device 813, and a lower right effect device 814 are provided on the back side of the base portion 51.

(Pattern 52)
The handle 52 is attached to the left side of the base 51 in front view. The handle 52 has a shape imitating a Japanese sword handle. The handle 52 is movable in the left-right direction.

(Sheath 53)
The sheath portion 53 is attached to the right side of the base portion 51 as viewed from the front. The sheath portion 53 has a shape imitating the sheath of a Japanese sword. Moreover, the sheath part 53 is movable in the left-right direction.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, the sub control board 400 drives the left effect device motor 651 and the right effect device motor 654 via the effect control board 600 and the effect device drive board 650, thereby causing the effect device 50 to move. A process that moves upward is performed. Then, when it is detected by the upper left effect device sensor 652s and the upper right effect device sensor 655s that the effect device 50 has moved to a predetermined position, the left effect device motor 651 and the right effect device motor 654 perform the operation of the effect device 50. The upward movement is stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 5C, after the effect device 50 is moved to a predetermined position, the sub control board 400 moves the handle 52 in the left direction in front view via the effect control board 600 and the effect device drive board 650. The movable process and the process of moving the sheath 53 in the right direction when viewed from the front are performed, and the upper left effect device 811 and the lower left effect device 812 are provided via the effect control board 600, the effect device drive board 650, and the effect device control board 800. Then, a process of moving the upper right effect device 813 and the lower right effect device 814 is performed. In addition, the sub control board 400 performs a process of emitting the LED incorporated in the base part that is not covered by the movement of the sheath part 53 via the effect control board 600 and the effect device drive board 650, and Via the effect control board 600, the effect device drive board 650, and the effect device control board 800, the LED incorporated in the upper left effect device 811, the LED incorporated in the lower left effect device 812, and the upper right effect device 813. The LED and the LED incorporated in the lower right effect device 814 are processed to emit light.

  Note that, after the effect by the effect device 50 as shown in FIG. 5C is performed, the sub control board 400 passes through the effect control board 600 and the effect device drive board 650, the left effect device motor 651, and the right By driving the effect device motor 654, a process of moving the effect device 50 downward is performed. When the lower left effect device sensor 653s and the lower right effect device sensor 656s detect that the effect device 50 has been moved to the original position before moving, the left effect device motor 651 and the right effect device motor 654 are detected. The downward movement of the rendering device 50 is stopped. In addition, when the sub-control board 400 moves the effect device 50 downward, the sub-control board 400 moves the handle 52 in the right direction in front view via the effect control board 600 and the effect device drive board 650, and a sheath part. 53 is moved in the left direction when viewed from the front, and through the effect control board 600, the effect device drive board 650, and the effect device control board 800, the upper left effect device 811, the lower left effect device 812, the upper right effect device 813, the right A process of returning the lower effect device 814 to the original position is performed. Further, the sub control board 400 performs a process of turning off the LED built in the base part covered with the sheath part 53 via the effect control board 600 and the effect device drive board 650, and the effect control board 600. The LED built in the upper left rendering device 811, the LED built in the lower left rendering device 812, and the LED built in the upper right rendering device 813 via the rendering device drive board 650 and the rendering device control board 800. Then, the process of turning off the LED built in the lower right effect device 814 is performed. Thereby, the rendering device 50 returns to the original position.

(Array data table)
Next, the array data table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The arrangement data table is provided in the main ROM 302, and the symbol position of the symbol displayed in the middle of the display window 23 when the left reel sensor 154s, the middle reel sensor 155s, and the right reel sensor 156s detect the reel index. Is defined as “00”. Also, symbol positions “00” to “20” are defined based on the symbol position “00”.

(The symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “00”)
Next, the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “00” will be described with reference to FIG.

  The symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “00” is stored in the main ROM 302, and includes a symbol combination name, a bit corresponding to the symbol combination name, a symbol bit name corresponding to the bit, and a symbol combination. The number of medals to be paid out to the player is defined.

  In addition, “preparation replay” is defined as the symbol bit name “REP01” in the bit “00000001” of the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “00”, and the symbol bit name “REP02” is included in the bit “00000010”. "First Bonus replay" is defined, bit "00000100" is defined as symbol bit name "REP03", "second Bonus replay" is defined, and bit "00001000" is defined as symbol bit name "REP04". "3rd Bonus Replay" is defined, "ART Replay" is defined as the symbol bit name "REP05" in the bit "00010000", and the symbol bit name "REP06" is defined in the bit "00100000". As "Special Lip ”Is defined,“ RUSH replay ”is defined for the bit“ 01000000 ”as the symbol bit name“ REP07 ”, and“ middle stage replay ”is defined for the bit“ 10000000 ”as the symbol bit name“ REP08 ”. Is stipulated.

  Here, when the combination of symbols displayed along the active line matches the symbol combination specified in the symbol combination table, the main CPU 301 pays out medals, activates a re-game, and plays a game state. Control to give a privilege such as migration is performed. For example, when the symbol combination “replay A”, “replay A”, and “BAR” is displayed on the active line, the main CPU 301 displays the symbol combination related to “preparation replay”. It determines with having been carried out, and the control which transfers to the below-mentioned 2RT gaming state is performed with the action | operation of a re-game. Note that if the symbol combination displayed along the active line does not match the symbol combination defined in the symbol combination table, it is “lost”.

(The symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “01”)
Next, a symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “01” will be described with reference to FIG.

  Similar to the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “00”, the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “01” is stored in the main ROM 302. The symbol combination name, the bit corresponding to the symbol combination name, The symbol name corresponding to the bit, the combination of symbols, and the number of medals to be paid out to the player are defined.

  In addition, in the symbol combination table bit “00000001” of the symbol combination group “01”, “upward right replay” is defined as the symbol bit name “REP09”, and the symbol bit name “00000010” includes the symbol bit name “ “BAR replay” is defined as “REP10”, “upper watermelon play” is defined as symbol bit name “REP11” in bit “00000100”, and symbol bit name “REP12” is defined in bit “00001000”. "Lower watermelon play" is defined, bit "00010000" is defined as symbol bit name "REP13", "upper cherry replay" is defined, and bit "00100000" is defined as symbol bit name "REP14". "" “Rei” is defined, “First Chance Replay” is defined as the symbol bit name “REP15” in the bit “01000000”, and “Bit 16000000” is defined as the symbol bit name “REP16”. The “second chance replay” is defined.

  Here, in the present embodiment, “preparation replay”, “first Bonus replay”, “second Bonus replay”, “third Bonus replay”, “ART replay”, “special replay”, “RUSH replay”, “middle replay”. ”,“ Upward right replay ”,“ BAR replay ”,“ upper watermelon play ”,“ lower watermelon play ”,“ upper cherry replay ”,“ lower cherry replay ”,“ first chance replay ”,“ second chance ” When the symbol combination related to “Replay” is displayed on the active line, the re-game is activated. Here, when the re-game operation is performed, the game can be performed without inserting medals.

(The symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “02”)
Next, the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “02” will be described with reference to FIG.

  The symbol combination table with the symbol combination group “02” is stored in the main ROM 302 in the same manner as the symbol combination table with the symbol combination group “00” and the symbol combination table with the symbol combination group “01”. The combination name, the bit corresponding to the symbol combination name, the symbol bit name corresponding to the bit, the symbol combination, and the number of medals to be paid out to the player are defined.

  Also, in the symbol combination table bit “00000001” of the symbol combination group “02”, “first push order bell” is defined as the symbol bit name “NML01”, and the symbol “00000010” includes the symbol bit. The name “NML02” is defined as “second push order bell”, the bit “00000100” is designated as the symbol bit name “NML03”, “third push order bell”, and the bit “00001000” is designated. “4th push order bell” is defined as the design bit name “NML04”, and “5th push order bell” is defined as the design bit name “NML05” in the bit “00010000”. “00100000” defines “sixth push order bell” as the symbol bit name “NML06”. The bit “01000000” defines the “seventh push order bell” as the symbol bit name “NML07”, and the bit “10000000” has the “eighth push order bell” as the symbol bit name “NML08”. It is prescribed.

(The symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “03”)
Next, the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “03” will be described with reference to FIG.

  The symbol combination table with the symbol combination group “03” includes the symbol combination table with the symbol combination group “00”, the symbol combination table with the symbol combination group “01”, and the symbol combination table with the symbol combination group “02”. Similarly, stored in the main ROM 302, the symbol combination name, the bit corresponding to the symbol combination name, the symbol bit name corresponding to the bit, the symbol combination, and the medal to be paid out to the player The number of payouts is specified.

  In addition, in the symbol combination table bit “00000001” in which the symbol combination group is “03”, the symbol bit name “NML09” is defined as “9th push order bell”, and the symbol “00000010” includes symbol bits. “10th push order bell” is defined as the name “NML10”, “11th push order bell” is defined as the design bit name “NML11” in the bit “00000100”, and the bit “00001000” Is defined with the symbol bit name “NML12” as “12th pushing order bell”, the bit “00010000” is defined with the symbol bit name “NML13” as “correct answer bell”, and the bit “00100000”. Has a bit name “NML14” and “watermelon that goes up to the right” The bit “01000000” is defined as “Right-down watermelon” as the symbol bit name “NML15”, and the bit “10000000” is defined as “first chance” as the symbol bit name “NML16”. Yes.

(The symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “04”)
Next, a symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “04” will be described with reference to FIG.

  The symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “04” is a symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “00”, a symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “01”, a symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “02”, Similar to the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “03”, it is stored in the main ROM 302. The symbol combination name, the bit corresponding to the symbol combination name, the symbol bit name corresponding to the bit, The combination and the number of medals to be paid out to the player are defined.

  In addition, in the symbol combination table with the symbol combination group “04”, the bit “00000001” defines “second chance” as the symbol bit name “NML17”, and the bit “00000010” includes the symbol bit name. “NML18” defines “first cherry”, bit “00000100” defines symbol bit name “NML19”, “second cherry”, and bit “00001000” includes symbol bit name “NML20” defines “middle stage cherry”, bit “00010000” defines symbol bit name “BLK01”, “first blank”, and bit “00100000” includes symbol bit name “ BLK02 "is defined as" second blank "and bit To 01000000 ", as the symbol bit name" BLK03 "" third blank "are defined, the bit" 10000000 "is" fourth blank "is defined as the symbol bit name" BLK04 ".

  Here, in the present embodiment, a combination of symbols relating to “first push order bell”, a combination of symbols relating to “second push order bell”, a combination of symbols relating to “third push order bell”, “ A combination of symbols related to “4 push order bell”, a combination of symbols related to “5th push order bell”, a combination of symbols related to “6th push order bell”, a combination of symbols related to “7th push order bell”, The combination of symbols related to “8th push order bell”, the combination of symbols related to “9th push order bell”, the combination of symbols related to “10th push order bell”, and the design related to “11th push order bell” Combination, symbol combination related to “12th push order bell”, symbol combination related to “correct answer bell”, symbol combination related to “right rising watermelon”, symbol combination related to “right falling watermelon”, “first The combination of symbols relating to “Cancel”, the combination of symbols relating to “Second Chance”, the combination of symbols relating to “First Cherry”, the combination of symbols relating to “Second Cherry”, the symbol relating to “Middle Cherry” When the combination is displayed on the active line, medals are paid out.

  In addition, a combination of symbols related to “first push order bell”, a combination of symbols related to “second push order bell”, a combination of symbols related to “third push order bell”, and a “fourth push order bell” A combination of symbols, a combination of symbols related to "5th push order bell", a combination of symbols related to "6th push order bell", a combination of symbols related to "7th push order bell", and an "8th push order bell" A combination of symbols related to “9th push order bell”, a combination of symbols related to “10th push order bell”, a combination of symbols related to “11th push order bell”, “12th push order” The combination of symbols relating to "Bell", the combination of symbols relating to "Bell", the combination of symbols relating to "Right-up watermelon", the combination of symbols relating to "Right-down watermelon", and the symbol relating to "First chance" Collectively, symbol combination related to “second chance”, symbol combination related to “first cherry”, symbol combination related to “second cherry”, symbol combination related to “middle cherries” This is a combination of symbols related to “winning”.

  In addition, a combination of symbols relating to “first push order bell”, a combination of symbols relating to “second push order bell”, a combination of symbols relating to “third push order bell”, and a “fourth push order bell” A combination of symbols, a combination of symbols related to "5th push order bell", a combination of symbols related to "6th push order bell", a combination of symbols related to "7th push order bell", and an "8th push order bell" A combination of symbols related to “9th push order bell”, a combination of symbols related to “10th push order bell”, a combination of symbols related to “11th push order bell”, “12th push order” A combination of symbols relating to “bell” is collectively referred to as a combination of symbols relating to “push order bell”.

  In addition, a combination of symbols relating to “first push order bell”, a combination of symbols relating to “second push order bell”, a combination of symbols relating to “third push order bell”, and a “fourth push order bell” A combination of symbols, a combination of symbols related to "5th push order bell", a combination of symbols related to "6th push order bell", a combination of symbols related to "7th push order bell", and an "8th push order bell" A combination of symbols related to “9th push order bell”, a combination of symbols related to “10th push order bell”, a combination of symbols related to “11th push order bell”, “12th push order” A combination of symbols relating to “bell” and a combination of symbols relating to “correct bell” are collectively referred to as a combination of symbols relating to “bell”.

  In addition, a combination of symbols related to “rising watermelon” and a combination of symbols related to “downward watermelon” are collectively referred to as a combination of symbols related to “watermelon”.

  In addition, a combination of symbols related to “first chance” and a combination of symbols related to “second chance” are collectively referred to as a combination of symbols related to “chance”.

  In addition, a symbol combination related to “first cherry”, a symbol combination related to “second cherry”, and a symbol combination related to “middle cherry” are collectively referred to as a symbol combination related to “cherry”.

  In addition, a combination of symbols related to “first blank”, a combination of symbols related to “second blank”, a combination of symbols related to “third blank”, and a combination of symbols related to “fourth blank” This is a combination of symbols related to “blank”.

  On the other hand, the symbol combination related to “Preparation Replay”, the symbol combination related to “First Bonus Replay”, the symbol combination related to “Second Bonus Replay”, the symbol combination related to “Third Bonus Replay”, and “ART Replay” A combination of symbols, a combination of symbols related to “Special Replay”, a combination of symbols related to “RUSH Replay”, a combination of symbols related to “Middle Replay”, a combination of symbols related to “Right Up Replay”, “BAR Replay” A combination of symbols related to `` upper watermelon play '', a combination of symbols related to `` lower watermelon play '', a combination of symbols related to `` upper cherry replay '', a combination of symbols related to `` lower cherry replay '', Responsible for "First Chance Replay" Combination of symbols, are collectively the combination of symbols relating to the "second chance eyes Replay", that the combination of symbols relating to the "Replay".

  In addition, a symbol combination related to “First Bonus Replay”, a symbol combination related to “Second Bonus Replay”, and a symbol combination related to “Third Bonus Replay” are collectively referred to as a symbol combination related to “Bonus Replay”.

  Further, a symbol combination related to “middle replay” and a symbol combination related to “upward replay” are collectively referred to as a symbol combination related to “normal replay”.

  In addition, a combination of symbols related to “upper watermelon play” and a combination of symbols related to “lower watermelon play” are collectively referred to as a combination of symbols related to “watermelon play”.

  In addition, a symbol combination related to “upper cherry replay” and a symbol combination related to “lower cherry replay” are collectively referred to as a symbol combination related to “cherry replay”.

  In addition, the symbol combination related to “first chance replay” and the symbol combination related to “second chance replay” are collectively referred to as a symbol combination related to “chance eye replay”.

(Relationship between winning role, stop button operation order, winnings, etc.)
Next, based on FIG. 12, the relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop button, and winnings will be described.

  In FIG. 12, the winning number corresponding to the winning combination, the contents of the winning number, the condition device corresponding to the winning combination, whether or not each game state can be determined as the winning combination, and the stop operation order are on the active line. The relationship with the combination of the symbols which can be displayed is shown.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 12, the condition device to be operated varies depending on the determined winning combination. For example, when the winning combination of the winning number “13” is determined by the internal lottery process described later, the condition devices that are to be activated are “REP08” and “REP09”. In other words, when the winning combination of the winning number “13” is determined, any combination of symbols related to “middle replay” or symbol combination related to “upward replay” is on the active line. Will be displayed.

  In this embodiment, even if the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated at the same symbol position, the player operates the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. Depending on the order, winning combinations with different combinations of symbols on the active line are provided. For example, when the “Bonus replay BR1” with the winning number “17” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the conditional devices that are activated are “REP08”, “REP09”, “REP10”. , “REP12”, and “REP15”. In this case, when the left stop button 11 is operated for the first time, any one of the symbol combinations related to “middle replay”, “upward replay”, “BAR replay”, or “lower watermelon play” is selected. The combination of symbols will be displayed on the active line. Further, when the middle stop button 12 is operated first, the symbol combination related to “middle stage replay” is displayed on the active line. In addition, when the right stop button 13 is first operated, one of the symbol combinations related to “middle stage replay” or “BAR replay” is displayed on the active line. .

  However, in this case, when the left stop button 11 is operated for the first time, out of the symbol combinations related to “BAR replay”, the symbol combination allowed to be displayed on the effective line and the effective line There are combinations of symbols that are not allowed to be displayed. Similarly, even when the right stop button 13 is operated for the first time, among the symbol combinations related to “BAR replay”, the symbol combinations that are allowed to be displayed on the effective line and the symbol line are displayed on the effective line. There are combinations of symbols that are not allowed.

  On the other hand, a winning combination is provided in which the combination of symbols arranged on the active line does not differ regardless of the order of operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. For example, when the “common bell” of the winning number “31” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the conditional devices that are activated are “NML01”, “NML02”, “NML03”, “NML03” NML04, “NML05”, “NML06”, “NML07”, “NML08”, “NML09”, “NML10”, “NML11”, “NML12”, and “NML13”. In this case, whether the left stop button 11 is operated first, the middle stop button 12 is operated first, or the right stop button 13 is operated first, the “first push Of the symbol combinations related to “order bell”, “second push order bell”, “third push order bell”, “fourth push order bell”, or “correct answer bell”, any of the symbol combinations is an effective line. Will be displayed above.

  In addition, the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated at an appropriate timing regardless of the order of operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. Otherwise, the symbol combination related to “winning” may not be displayed on the active line. For example, when the “watermelon” with the winning number “25” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the condition devices that are activated are “NML14” and “NML15”. In this case, regardless of whether the left stop button 11 is first operated, the middle stop button 12 is first operated, or the right stop button 13 is first operated, ”Or the symbol combination related to“ Right-down watermelon ”can be displayed on the active line, but the left stop button 11 and the middle stop button 12 can be displayed at an appropriate timing. If the right stop button 13 is not operated, one of the symbol combinations related to “Right-up watermelon” or the symbol combination related to “Right-down watermelon” is displayed on the active line. Never happen.

(First winning combination determination table for non-RT gaming state)
Next, the first winning combination determination table for non-RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The non-RT gaming state first winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when determining a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in a non-RT gaming state described later.

  Further, in the first winning combination determination table for the non-RT gaming state, the winning number, the contents of the winning number, the lottery value for each set value, and the lottery value of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number are all set common values. Whether or not is specified. Here, in the present embodiment, the first winning combination determination table for the non-RT gaming state includes the lottery value when the setting value is “1”, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, and the setting value. The lottery value when “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, the lottery value when the setting value is “5”, and the lottery value when the setting value is “6” are defined respectively. Has been. In FIG. 13, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, the lottery value when the setting value is “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and the setting value is “5”. Illustration of lottery values in this case is omitted.

  In the first winning combination determination table for the non-RT gaming state, a lottery value is defined only for “normal replay” of the winning number “13”.

  That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the first winning combination determination table for the non-RT gaming state, the “preparation state transition replay JR1” with the winning number “01”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR2” with winning number “02”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR3” with winning number “03”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR4” with winning number “04”, “Direct hit” with winning number “05” “Bonus”, “Bonus rush replay BI1” with winning number “06”, “Bonus rush replay BI2” with winning number “07”, “Bonus rush replay BI3” with winning number “08”, “ART” with winning number “09” “Replay AR1”, “Replay AR2 during ART” with winning number “10”, “Replay AR3 during ART” with winning number “11”, “Replay AR3 during winning” “12” RT replay AR4 ”, winning number“ 14 ”“ RUSH replay R1 ”, winning number“ 15 ”“ RUSH replay R2 ”, winning number“ 16 ”“ state transition replay ”, winning number“ 17 ”“ Bonus ” “Medium Replay BR1”, Winning Number “18” “Bonus Replay BR2”, Winning Number “19” “Bonus Replay BR3”, Winning Number “20” “Watermelon Play”, Winning Number “21” “Weak” “Cherry Replay”, “Strong Cherry Replay” with the winning number “22”, and “Chance Eye Replay CR1” with the winning number “23” are not determined as the winning combination.

(First winning combination determination table for first RT gaming state)
Next, the first winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The first RT game state first winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302, and is used when determining a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the first RT gaming state described later.

  Further, in the first winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state, the winning number, the contents of the winning number, the lottery value for each set value, and the lottery value of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number are all set common values. Whether or not is specified. Here, in the present embodiment, the first winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state includes the lottery value when the setting value is “1”, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, and the setting value. The lottery value when “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, the lottery value when the setting value is “5”, and the lottery value when the setting value is “6” are defined respectively. Has been. In FIG. 14, the lottery value when the set value is “2”, the lottery value when the set value is “3”, the lottery value when the set value is “4”, and the set value is “5”. Illustration of lottery values in this case is omitted.

  In addition, the first RT combination determination table for the first RT gaming state includes “preparation state transfer replay JR1” with a win number “01”, “preparation state transfer replay JR2” with a win number “02”, and “ Lottery values are defined for “preparation state transition replay JR3”, “preparation state transition replay JR4” with a winning number “04”, and “direct hit Bonus” with a winning number “05”.

  That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the first winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state, “Bonus rush replay BI1” with the winning number “06”, winning “Bonus rush replay BI2” with the number “07”, “Bonus rush replay BI3” with the winning number “08”, “Replay during ART AR1” with the winning number “09”, “Replay AR2 during ART” with the winning number “10” The winning number “11” “ART replay AR3”, the winning number “12” “ART replay AR4”, the winning number “13” “normal replay”, the winning number “14” “RUSH replay R1”, “RUSH replay R2” with winning number “15”, “state transition replay” with winning number “16”, “Bonus replay BR1” with winning number “17” , “Replay BR2 during Bonus” with a winning number “18”, “Replay BR3 during Bonus” with a winning number “19”, “Watermelon play” with a winning number “20”, “Weak cherry replay” with a winning number “21”, The “strong cherry replay” with the winning number “22” and the “chance eye replay CR1” with the winning number “23” are not determined as the winning combination.

(First winning combination determination table for second RT gaming state)
Next, the first winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The first winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when determining the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the second RT gaming state described later.

  In the first RT combination determination table for the second RT gaming state, the winning number, the contents of the winning number, the lottery value for each set value, and the lottery value of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number are all set common values. Whether or not is specified. Here, in the present embodiment, the first winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state includes the lottery value when the setting value is “1”, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, and the setting value. The lottery value when “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, the lottery value when the setting value is “5”, and the lottery value when the setting value is “6” are defined respectively. Has been. In FIG. 15, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, the lottery value when the setting value is “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and the setting value is “5”. Illustration of lottery values in this case is omitted.

  Further, the first winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state includes “Bonus rush replay BI1” with the winning number “06”, “Bonus rush replay BI2” with the winning number “07”, and “Bonus rush” with the winning number “08”. A lottery value is defined in “Replay BI3”.

  That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the first RT combination determination table for the second RT gaming state, “preparation state transition replay JR1” with the winning number “01”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR2” with winning number “02”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR3” with winning number “03”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR4” with winning number “04”, “Direct hit” with winning number “05” “Bonus”, “09 Replay AR1” with winning number “09”, “Replay AR2 during ART” with winning number “10”, “Replay AR3 during ART” with winning number “11”, “ART” with winning number “12” “Medium Replay AR4”, “Normal Replay” with Winning Number “13”, “RUSH Replay R1” with Winning Number “14”, “RUSH Replay R2” with Winning Number “15”, Winning "Status transition replay" of issue "16", "Replay BR1 during Bonus" with winning number "17", "Replay during Bonus BR2" with winning number "18", "Replay during Bonus BR3" with winning number "19", Winning number “20” “Watermelon Play”, Winning Number “21” “Weak Cherry Replay”, Winning Number “22” “Strong Cherry Replay”, Winning Number “23” “Chance Eye Replay CR1” Will not be determined as.

(First winning combination determination table for 3RT gaming state)
Next, the first winning combination determination table for the third RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The first winning combination determination table for the third RT gaming state is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when determining the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the third RT gaming state described later.

  In the first RT combination determination table for the 3RT gaming state, the winning number, the contents of the winning number, the lottery value for each set value, and the lottery value of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number are all set common values. Whether or not is specified. Here, in this embodiment, the first winning combination determination table for the 3RT gaming state includes a lottery value when the set value is “1”, a lottery value when the set value is “2”, and the set value is The lottery value when “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, the lottery value when the setting value is “5”, and the lottery value when the setting value is “6” are defined respectively. Has been. In FIG. 16, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, the lottery value when the setting value is “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and the setting value is “5”. Illustration of lottery values in this case is omitted.

  The first RT combination determination table for the 3RT gaming state includes “normal replay” with a winning number “13”, “state transition replay” with a winning number “16”, and “Bonus replay BR1” with a winning number “17”. , “Replay BR2 during Bonus” with a winning number “18”, “Replay BR3 during Bonus” with a winning number “19”, “Watermelon play” with a winning number “20”, “Weak cherry replay” with a winning number “21”, A lottery value is defined for “strong cherry replay” with a winning number “22” and “chance eye replay CR1” with a winning number “23”.

  That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the first winning combination determination table for the 3RT gaming state, “preparation state transition replay JR1” with the winning number “01”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR2” with winning number “02”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR3” with winning number “03”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR4” with winning number “04”, “Direct hit” with winning number “05” “Bonus”, “Bonus rush replay BI1” with winning number “06”, “Bonus rush replay BI2” with winning number “07”, “Bonus rush replay BI3” with winning number “08”, “ART” with winning number “09” “Replay AR1”, “Replay AR2 during ART” with winning number “10”, “Replay AR3 during ART” with winning number “11”, and “12” as winning number ART during the replay AR4 "," RUSH replay R1 "winning numbers" 14 "," RUSH replay R2 of the winning number "15" ", will not be determined as a winning combination.

(First winning combination determination table for 4RT gaming state)
Next, the first winning combination determination table for the fourth RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The first winning combination determination table for the fourth RT gaming state is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when determining the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the fourth RT gaming state described later.

  In the first RT winning state determination table for the 4RT gaming state, the winning number, the contents of the winning number, the lottery value for each set value, and the lottery value of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number are all set common values. Whether or not is specified. Here, in the present embodiment, the fourth RT gaming state first winning combination determination table includes a lottery value when the setting value is “1”, a lottery value when the setting value is “2”, and the setting value is The lottery value when “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, the lottery value when the setting value is “5”, and the lottery value when the setting value is “6” are defined respectively. Has been. In FIG. 17, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, the lottery value when the setting value is “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and the setting value is “5”. Illustration of lottery values in this case is omitted.

  In addition, the first winning combination determination table for the 4RT gaming state includes “Replay AR1 during ART” with a winning number “09”, “Replay AR2 during ART” with a winning number “10”, “During ART” with a winning number “11”. “Replay AR3”, “Replay AR4 during ART” with winning number “12”, “Normal replay” with winning number “13”, “Watermelon play” with winning number “20”, “Weak cherry replay” with winning number “21” A lottery value is defined for “strong cherry replay” with a winning number “22” and “chance eye replay CR1” with a winning number “23”.

  That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the first winning combination determination table for the 4RT gaming state, “preparation state transition replay JR1” with the winning number “01”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR2” with winning number “02”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR3” with winning number “03”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR4” with winning number “04”, “Direct hit” with winning number “05” “Bonus”, “Bonus rush replay BI1” with winning number “06”, “Bonus rush replay BI2” with winning number “07”, “Bonus rush replay BI3” with winning number “08”, “RUSH” with winning number “14” “Replay R1”, “RUSH Replay R2” with a winning number “15”, “State Transition Replay” with a winning number “16”, “Bonu” with a winning number “17” Medium replay BR1 "," Bonus in the Replay BR2 of the winning number "18" ", will not be determined as the" Bonus in the Replay BR3 "is the winning combination of winning numbers" 19 ".

(First winning combination determination table for the 5th RT gaming state)
Next, the first winning combination determination table for the fifth RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The first winning combination determination table for the fifth RT gaming state is stored in the main ROM 302, and is used when determining the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the fifth RT gaming state described later.

  In the first RT combination table for the 5RT gaming state, the winning number, the contents of the winning number, the lottery value for each set value, and the lottery value of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number are all set common values. Whether or not is specified. Here, in the present embodiment, the first winning combination determination table for the fifth RT gaming state includes the lottery value when the setting value is “1”, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, and the setting value. The lottery value when “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, the lottery value when the setting value is “5”, and the lottery value when the setting value is “6” are defined respectively. Has been. In FIG. 18, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, the lottery value when the setting value is “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and the setting value is “5”. Illustration of lottery values in this case is omitted.

  Further, the first RT combination table for the 5RT gaming state includes “RUSH replay R1” with a winning number “14”, “RUSH replay R2” with a winning number “15”, “Watermelon play” with a winning number “20”, Lottery values are defined for “weak cherry replay” with winning number “21”, “strong cherry replay” with winning number “22”, and “chance eye replay CR1” with winning number “23”.

  That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the first RT combination determination table for the fifth RT gaming state, “preparation state transition replay JR1” with the winning number “01” “Preparation state transfer replay JR2” with winning number “02”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR3” with winning number “03”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR4” with winning number “04”, “Direct hit” with winning number “05” “Bonus”, “Bonus rush replay BI1” with winning number “06”, “Bonus rush replay BI2” with winning number “07”, “Bonus rush replay BI3” with winning number “08”, “ART” with winning number “09” “Replay AR1”, “Replay AR2 during ART” with winning number “10”, “Replay AR3 during ART” with winning number “11”, and “12” as winning number "Replay AR4 during ART", "Normal replay" with winning number "13", "Status transition replay" with winning number "16", "Replay BR1 during Bonus" with winning number "17", "Bonus" with winning number "18" “Replay BR2” and “Bonus Replay BR3” with the winning number “19” are not determined as the winning combination.

(First winning combination determination table for 6RT gaming state)
Next, the first winning combination determination table for the sixth RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The first winning combination determination table for the sixth RT gaming state is stored in the main ROM 302, and is used when determining the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later in the sixth RT gaming state described later.

  Further, in the first RT combination determination table for the 6RT gaming state, the winning number, the contents of the winning number, the lottery value for each setting value, and the lottery value of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number are all set common values. Whether or not is specified. Here, in the present embodiment, the sixth RT gaming state first winning combination determination table includes the lottery value when the set value is “1”, the lottery value when the set value is “2”, and the set value. The lottery value when “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, the lottery value when the setting value is “5”, and the lottery value when the setting value is “6” are defined respectively. Has been. In FIG. 19, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, the lottery value when the setting value is “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and the setting value is “5”. Illustration of lottery values in this case is omitted.

  In addition, the first winning combination determination table for the 6RT gaming state includes “Replay AR1 during ART” with a winning number “09”, “Replay AR2 during ART” with a winning number “10”, “During ART” with a winning number “11”. A lottery value is defined for “Replay AR3” and winning number “12” “Replay AR4 during ART”.

  That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the first RT combination determination table for the fifth RT gaming state, “preparation state transition replay JR1” with the winning number “01” “Preparation state transfer replay JR2” with winning number “02”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR3” with winning number “03”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR4” with winning number “04”, “Direct hit” with winning number “05” “Bonus”, “Bonus rush replay BI1” with winning number “06”, “Bonus rush replay BI2” with winning number “07”, “Bonus rush replay BI3” with winning number “08”, “Normal” with winning number “13” "Replay", "RUSH replay R1" with winning number "14", "RUSH replay R2" with winning number "15", "Status transition rep" with winning number "16" "Bonus replay BR1" with winning number "17", "Replay BR2 with Bonus" with winning number "18", "Replay BR3 in Bonus" with winning number "19", "Watermelon with winning number" 20 " “Replay”, “weak cherry replay” with a winning number “21”, “strong cherry replay” with a winning number “22”, and “chance eye replay CR1” with a winning number “23” are not determined as winning combinations.

  The first winning combination determination table for the non-RT gaming state, the first winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state, the first winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state, the first winning combination determination table for the third RT gaming state, The first winning combination determination table for the fourth RT gaming state, the first winning combination determination table for the fifth RT gaming state, and the first winning combination determination table for the sixth RT gaming state are collectively referred to as a “first winning combination determination table”.

  Note that “preparation state transfer replay JR1” with a winning number “01”, “preparation state transfer replay JR2” with a winning number “02”, “preparation state transfer replay JR3” with a winning number “03”, and a winning number “ 04 ”“ preparation state transition replay JR4 ”is collectively referred to as“ preparation state transition replay ”.

  Also, “Bonus rush replay BI1” with winning number “06”, “Bonus rush replay BI2” with winning number “07”, and “Bonus rush replay BI3” with winning number “08” are collectively referred to as “Bonus rush replay BI3”. "

  Also, the winning number “09” “ART replay AR1”, the winning number “10” “ART replay AR2”, the winning number “11” “ART replay AR3”, and the winning number “12”. “Replay during ART AR4” is collectively referred to as “replay during ART”.

  The winning number “14” “RUSH replay R1” and the winning number “15” “RUSH replay R2” are collectively referred to as “RUSH replay”.

  Also, “Replay BR1 during Bonus” with the winning number “17”, “Replay BR2 during Bonus” with the winning number “18”, and “Replay BR3 during Bonus” with the winning number “19” are collectively referred to as “Replay during Bonus”. "

  Also, “weak cherry replay” with a winning number “21” and “strong cherry replay” with a winning number “22” are collectively referred to as “cherry replay”.

(Second winning combination determination table)
Next, the second winning combination determination table will be described based on FIG.

  The second winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302, and will be described later in a non-RT gaming state, a first RT gaming state, a second RT gaming state, a third RT gaming state, a fourth RT gaming state, a fifth RT gaming state, and a sixth RT. This is used when a winning combination is determined by an internal lottery process described later in the gaming state.

  Similarly to the first winning combination determination table, the second winning combination determination table includes all the winning numbers, the contents of the winning numbers, the lottery values for each set value, and the lottery values of the winning combinations corresponding to the winning numbers. Whether the value is a common setting value is defined. Here, in the present embodiment, the second winning combination determination table includes a lottery value when the setting value is “1”, a lottery value when the setting value is “2”, and a case where the setting value is “3”. The lottery value, the lottery value when the set value is “4”, the lottery value when the set value is “5”, and the lottery value when the set value is “6” are respectively defined. In FIG. 20, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, the lottery value when the setting value is “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and the setting value is “5”. Illustration of lottery values in this case is omitted.

  Further, the second winning combination determination table includes “chance eye replay CR2” with a winning number “24”, “watermelon” with a winning number “25”, “weak cherry” with a winning number “26”, and a winning number “27”. “Strong Cherry”, “Middle Cherry” with Winning Number “28”, “Chance Eye CN1” with Winning Number “29”, “Chance Eye CN2” with Winning Number “30”, “Common Bell” with Winning Number “31” , “Push Order Bell A1” with a winning number “32”, “Push Order Bell B1” with a winning number “33”, “Push Order Bell A2” with a winning number “34”, “Push Order Bell” with a winning number “35”. “B2”, “Push Order Bell A3” with a winning number “36”, “Push Order Bell B3” with a winning number “37”, “Push Order Bell A4” with a winning number “38”, “Press” A lottery value is defined for “order bell B4”.

  Here, the relationship between the first winning combination determination table and the second winning combination determination table will be described. When a lottery is performed using the first winning combination determination table, the winning combination is determined according to the current gaming state. There are rules regarding winning roles and winning roles that are not determined as winning roles. On the other hand, when a lottery is performed using the second winning combination determination table, a winning combination that can be determined as a winning combination in all game states is defined.

  The “chance eye replay CR1” with the winning number “23” and the “chance eye replay CR2” with the winning number “24” are collectively referred to as “chance eye replay”.

  Also, the “weak cherry” with the winning number “26”, the “strong cherry” with the winning number “27”, and the “middle cherry” with the winning number “28” are collectively referred to as “cherry”.

  The “chance eye CN1” with the winning number “29” and the “chance eye CN2” with the winning number “30” are collectively referred to as “chance eyes”.

  Also, the “common bell” of the winning number “31”, the “push order bell A1” of the winning number “32”, the “push order bell B1” of the winning number “33”, and the “push” of the winning number “34” "Sequence Bell A2", "Push Order Bell B2" with Winning Number "35", "Push Order Bell A3" with Winning Number "36", "Push Order Bell B3" with Winning Number "37", Winning Number The “push order bell A4” of “38” and the “push order bell B4” of the winning number “39” are collectively referred to as “bell”.

  In addition, the “push order bell A1” of the winning number “32”, the “push order bell B1” of the win number “33”, the “push order bell A2” of the win number “34”, and the win number “35”. “Push Order Bell B2”, “Push Order Bell A3” with a winning number “36”, “Push Order Bell B3” with a winning number “37”, “Push Order Bell A4” with a winning number “38”, The “push order bell B4” of the winning number “39” is collectively referred to as “push order bell”.

(Game state transition diagram)
Next, the game state transition diagram will be described with reference to FIG.

  The game state transition diagram defines a current game state, a transition condition that is a condition for transitioning the game state, and a game state of a transition destination.

  Here, in the case where the current gaming state is a non-RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “blank” is displayed on the active line, the non-RT gaming state is Transition to the first RT gaming state.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is the first RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “preparation replay” is displayed on the active line, the first RT gaming state is Transition to the second RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the first RT gaming state, when one of the symbol combinations related to “Bonus Replay” is displayed on the active line, the first RT gaming state is Transition to the third RT gaming state.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is the second RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “blank” is displayed on the active line, the second RT gaming state is changed to the second RT gaming state. Transition to the 1RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the second RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “Bonus Replay” is displayed on the active line, Transition to the third RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, in the case where the current gaming state is the second RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “ART replay” is displayed on the active line, the second RT gaming state is Transition to the fourth RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the second RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “RUSH replay” is displayed on the active line, Transition to the fifth RT gaming state.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is the third RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “blank” is displayed on the active line, the third RT gaming state is changed to the third RT gaming state. Transition to the 1RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, in the case where the current gaming state is the third RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “ART replay” is displayed on the active line, Transition to the fourth RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the third RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “RUSH replay” is displayed on the active line, Transition to the fifth RT gaming state.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is the fourth RT gaming state, when any symbol combination among the symbol combinations related to “blank” is displayed on the activated line, the fourth RT gaming state is changed to the fourth RT gaming state. Transition to the 1RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the fourth RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “RUSH replay” is displayed on the active line, the fourth RT gaming state Transition to the fifth RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, in the case where the current gaming state is the 4RT gaming state, when one of the symbol combinations related to “special replay” is displayed on the active line, Transition to the sixth RT gaming state.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is the fifth RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “blank” is displayed on the active line, the fifth RT gaming state is changed to the fifth RT gaming state. Transition to the 1RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the fifth RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “Bonus Replay” is displayed on the active line, Transition to the third RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the fifth RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “ART replay” is displayed on the active line, Transition to the fourth RT gaming state.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is the sixth RT gaming state, when any symbol combination among the symbol combinations related to “blank” is displayed on the active line, the sixth RT gaming state is changed to the sixth RT gaming state. Transition to the 1RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, in the case where the current gaming state is the sixth RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “ART replay” is displayed on the active line, from the sixth RT gaming state, Transition to the fourth RT gaming state.

(List of states managed by sub control board)
Next, a list of states managed by the sub control board will be described with reference to FIG.

  The list of states managed by the sub control board is defined for the state names and the numbers corresponding to the state names. Here, the states managed by the sub-control board in this embodiment are “normal state” with the state number “01”, “chance precursor state” with the state number “02”, and “state with the state number“ 03 ”. “Bonus precursor state”, “Chance state” with state number “04”, “Bonus ready state” with state number “05”, “First Bonus state” with state number “06”, state number “07” “Second Bonus State”, “Third Bonus State” with State Number “08”, “First Falling Standby State” with State Number “09”, “ART Ready State” with State Number “10”, State Number “11” “ART state”, “12” “first additional sign state”, “13” “first additional preparation state”, “14” “first additional state” "Status", status number "15" "Falling standby state", "Second addition sign state" with state number "16", "Second addition preparation state" with state number "17", "Second addition state" with state number "18", state A “third fall standby state” with a number “19” and a “fourth fall standby state” with a state number “20” are defined.

(Transition diagram of states managed by sub-control board)
Next, a state transition diagram managed by the sub control board will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of states managed by the sub control board 400 are provided separately from the gaming state controlled by the main control board 300. Hereinafter, description of each state and conditions for transition to each state will be given.

(Normal state)
The normal state is a disadvantageous state for the player. Here, in the present embodiment, in addition to performing the lottery for shifting to the Bonus ready state, the normal state is performed in the normal state by performing the lottery for shifting to the chance state that is easier to shift to the Bonus state than the normal state. Improves interest in games.

  Here, in the normal state, when the chance state shift lottery is won, control for shifting to the chance sign state is performed. Further, when the Bonus preparation state transition lottery is won, or when the value of a later-described ceiling game number counter becomes “0”, control for transitioning to the Bonus precursor state is performed. Furthermore, when “direct hit Bonus” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, control for shifting to the third Bonus state is performed.

(Predicting chance)
The chance precursor state is a state in which the transition is made before the transition from the normal state to the chance state. Here, in the chance sign state, an effect that suggests transition to the chance state is performed until the value of the game number counter for chance sign state described later becomes “0”. Thereby, it can be made to expect a player to shift to a chance state.

  Here, in the chance sign state, when the value of the game sign counter for chance sign state described later becomes “0”, control to shift to the chance state is performed. In addition, when the Bonus preparation state transition lottery is won in the chance sign state, or when the value of a later-described ceiling game number counter becomes “0”, control to transition to the Bonus sign state is performed. Furthermore, when “direct hit Bonus” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, control for shifting to the third Bonus state is performed.

(Bonus precursor state)
The Bonus precursor state is a state in which the transition is made before the transition from the normal state to the Bonus state. Here, the Bonus precursor state has an effect that suggests transition to the Bonus state until the value of the Bonus precursor state game number counter reaches “0”. As a result, the player can be expected to shift to the Bonus state.

  Here, in the Bonus precursor state, when the value of the below-mentioned Bonus precursor state game number counter is “0”, or when the value of the below-described ceiling game number counter is “0”, the Bonus preparation is performed. Control to shift to the state is performed. Furthermore, when “direct hit Bonus” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, control for shifting to the third Bonus state is performed.

(Chance state)
The chance state is a state in which the transition to the Bonus preparation state is easier than in the normal state. As a result, when the player shifts to the chance state, the player expects to shift to the Bonus preparation state.

  Here, in the chance state, when the value of a chance state game number counter, which will be described later, becomes “0”, control for shifting to the normal state is performed. In the chance state, when the bonus preparation state transition lottery is won, or when the value of a later-described ceiling game number counter becomes “0”, control for shifting to the bonus preparation state is performed. Furthermore, when “direct hit Bonus” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, control for shifting to the third Bonus state is performed.

(Bonus ready state)
The Bonus preparation state is a state in which the transition is made before the transition to the first Bonus state, the second Bonus state, and the third Bonus state. Here, in the Bonus preparation state, when the symbol combination related to “Bonus Replay” is displayed on the active line, control is performed to shift to one of the first Bonus state, the second Bonus state, and the third Bonus state. . In addition, when “direct hit Bonus” is determined by an internal lottery process to be described later, control for shifting to the third Bonus state is performed.

  Here, in the Bonus preparation state, “Preparation state transfer replay JR1”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR2”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR3”, or “Preparation state transfer replay JR4” is performed as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later. Is determined, the stop button operation display unit 35 and the liquid crystal display device 46 are notified of information for displaying the symbol combination related to “preparation replay” on the active line.

  Further, in the Bonus ready state, when “Bonus rush replay BI1”, “Bonus rush replay BI2”, or “Bonus rush replay BI3” is determined as a winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the Bonus standby described later is performed. Based on the value stored in the information storage area, the symbol combination related to “First Bonus Replay”, the symbol combination related to “Second Bonus Replay”, and the symbol combination related to “Third Bonus Replay” are placed on the active line. Information for display is notified by the stop button operation display unit 35 and the liquid crystal display device 46.

(First Bonus state)
The first Bonus state is an advantageous state for the player as compared to the normal state. Here, in the first Bonus state, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to shift to the ART preparation state. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting to shift to the ART ready state, so the interest in the game in the first Bonus state is improved.

  Here, in the first Bonus state, when it is determined to shift to the ART preparation state, control to shift to the ART preparation state is performed after the end of the first Bonus state. Further, in the first Bonus state, when it is not determined to shift to the ART preparation state, control to shift to the first fall standby state is performed after the end of the first Bonus state.

(Second Bonus state)
The second Bonus state is an advantageous state for the player as compared to the normal state. Here, in the second Bonus state, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to shift to the ART preparation state as in the first Bonus state. In the present embodiment, the lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the ART ready state in the second Bonus state shifts to the ART ready state as compared to the lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the ART ready state for the first Bonus state. The probability of being determined is high. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting to shift to the ART preparation state, so that the interest in the game in the second Bonus state is improved.

  Here, in the second Bonus state, when it is determined to shift to the ART preparation state, control to shift to the ART preparation state is performed after the end of the second Bonus state. Further, in the second Bonus state, when it is not determined to shift to the ART preparation state, control to shift to the first fall standby state is performed after the end of the second Bonus state.

(3rd Bonus state)
The third Bonus state is an advantageous state for the player as compared to the normal state. Here, the third Bonus state is different from the first Bonus state and the second Bonus state, and after the third Bonus is finished, control is always performed to shift to the ART preparation state. Thereby, since the player will play a game while expecting to shift to the third Bonus state, the interest in the game is improved.

(First fall standby state)
The first fall standby state is a state in which the transition to the ART ready state is not determined in the first Bonus state or the second Bonus state. Further, in the first fall standby state, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to shift to the ART preparation state. Here, in the first fall standby state, control for shifting to the normal state is performed based on the fact that the combination of symbols related to “blank” is displayed on the active line. Further, in the first fall standby state, when it is determined as a result of lottery whether or not to shift to the ART ready state, control to shift to the ART ready state is performed. Is called.

  Here, in the first fall standby state, “push order bell A1”, “push order bell A2”, “push order bell A3”, “push order bell A4”, “press When the “order bell B1”, “push order bell B2”, “push order bell B3”, or “push order bell B4” is determined, the combination of symbols related to “bell” is displayed on the active line. This information is not notified. In addition, when “state transition replay” is determined as the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, information for displaying a combination of symbols related to “normal replay” on the active line is notified. Accordingly, as the winning combination, “push order bell A1”, “push order bell A2”, “push order bell A3”, “push order bell A4”, “push order bell B1”, “push order bell B2”, “push order” If “Bell B3” or “Push Order Bell B4” is determined and the symbol combination related to “Bell” cannot be displayed on the effective line, the symbol combination related to “Blank” is the effective line. It will be displayed above and will shift to the normal state.

(ART ready state)
The ART ready state is when the first Bonus state or the second Bonus state ends or after the third Bonus state ends after it is determined that the state is shifted to the ART ready state in the first Bonus state or the second Bonus state. It is in a state of transition. Here, in the ART preparation state, control for shifting to the ART state is performed based on the combination of symbols related to “ART replay” being displayed on the active line.

  Here, in the ART ready state, when “state transition replay” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, information for displaying a combination of symbols related to “ART replay” on the active line Is notified by the stop button operation display unit 35 or the liquid crystal display device 46.

(ART state)
The ART state is an advantageous state for the player. Specifically, in the ART state, when “push order bell” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, information for displaying a combination of symbols related to “bell” on the active line is displayed. Control which notifies by the stop button operation display part 35 or the liquid crystal display device 46 is performed.

  Here, in the ART state, when it is determined to shift to the first added state, control to shift to the first added sign state is performed, and when it is determined to shift to the second added state Is controlled so as to shift to the second added sign state. Further, when the value of an ART state game number counter, which will be described later, becomes “0”, control for shifting to the fourth fall standby state is performed.

(First sign of sign)
The first extra sign state is a state that shifts from the ART state to the first additional preparation state. Here, in the first extra sign state, an effect suggesting that the first extra sign state is shifted to the first additional state until the value of a first extra sign state game number counter described later becomes “0” is performed. Thereby, it can be made to expect a player to transfer to a 1st addition state. Here, in the first extra sign state, when a value of a first extra sign state game number counter, which will be described later, becomes “0”, control for shifting to the first extra preparation state is performed.

(First addition preparation state)
The first add-on preparation state is a state that shifts from the first add-on sign state to the first add-on state. Here, in the first addition preparation state, control for shifting to the first addition state is performed based on the combination of symbols relating to “RUSH replay” being displayed on the active line.

  Here, in the first addition preparation state, when “art replay AR2” or “ART replay AR4” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, the symbol related to “RUSH replay” Information for displaying the combination on the effective line is notified by the stop button operation display unit 35 or the liquid crystal display device 46.

(First addition state)
The first added state is a state advantageous for the player, and is a state in which the number of games that can be played in the ART state is added. Specifically, the number of games that can be played in the ART state is added based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later. Here, in the first added state, control for shifting to the second fall standby state is performed based on the value of a first added state game number counter described later being “0”.

(Second fall standby state)
The second fall standby state is a state before the transition to the ART state after the first addition state is completed. Further, in the second fall standby state, control for shifting to the ART state is performed based on the combination of symbols related to “ART replay” being displayed on the active line.

  Here, in the second fall standby state, when “RUSH replay R1” or “RUSH replay R2” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process to be described later, a combination of symbols related to “ART replay” is selected. Information to be displayed on the active line is notified by the stop button operation display unit 35 and the liquid crystal display device 46.

(Second sign of sign)
The second surrender sign state is a state that shifts from the ART state to the second surplus preparation state. Here, in the second surrender sign state, an effect that suggests transition to the second surrender state is performed until the value of the second surrender sign game number counter described later becomes “0”. Thereby, it can be made to expect a player to transfer to a 2nd addition state. Here, when the value of a game counter for the number of second surrender sign state described later becomes “0” in the second surrender sign state, control for shifting to the second surrender preparation state is performed.

(2nd additional preparation state)
The second add-on preparation state is a state that shifts from the second add-on sign state to the second add-on state. Here, in the second addition preparation state, control for shifting to the second addition state is performed based on the combination of symbols related to “special replay” being displayed on the active line.

  Here, in the second addition preparation state, when “state transition replay” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, a combination of symbols related to “special replay” is displayed on the active line Is notified by the stop button operation display unit 35 and the liquid crystal display device 46.

(Second addition state)
The second added state is a state advantageous for the player, and is a state in which the number of games that can be played in the ART state is added. Specifically, the number of games that can be played in the ART state is added based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later. Here, in the second added state, control for shifting to the third fall standby state is performed based on the value of a second added state game number counter described later being “0”.

(Third fall standby state)
The third fall standby state is a state before the transition to the ART state after the second addition state ends. Further, in the second fall standby state, control for shifting to the ART state is performed based on the combination of symbols related to “ART replay” being displayed on the active line.

  Here, in the third fall standby state, when “winning ART replay AR1”, “ART replay AR2” or “ART replay AR3” is determined as the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, Information for displaying the symbol combination related to “Replay” on the active line is notified by the stop button operation display unit 35 or the liquid crystal display device 46.

(4th falling standby state)
The fourth fall standby state is a state that shifts after the ART state ends. Further, in the fourth fall standby state, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to shift to the ART state. Here, in the fourth fall standby state, control for shifting to the normal state is performed based on the fact that the combination of symbols related to “blank” is displayed on the active line. Further, in the fourth fall standby state, when it is determined to shift to the ART state as a result of lottery of whether to shift to the ART state, control to shift to the ART state is performed.

  Here, in the fourth fall standby state, “push order bell A1”, “push order bell A2”, “push order bell A3”, “push order bell A4”, “push” are performed by an internal lottery process described later. When the “order bell B1”, “push order bell B2”, “push order bell B3”, or “push order bell B4” is determined, the combination of symbols related to “bell” is displayed on the active line. This information is not notified. In addition, when “state transition replay” is determined as the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, information for displaying a combination of symbols related to “normal replay” on the active line is notified. Accordingly, as the winning combination, “push order bell A1”, “push order bell A2”, “push order bell A3”, “push order bell A4”, “push order bell B1”, “push order bell B2”, “push order” If “Bell B3” or “Push Order Bell B4” is determined and the symbol combination related to “Bell” cannot be displayed on the effective line, the symbol combination related to “Blank” is the effective line. It will be displayed above and will shift to the normal state.

  In the present embodiment, the ART state and the like are managed by the sub control board 400, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the ART state or the like may be managed by the main control board 300.

(Direction decision table)
Next, the effect determination table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The effect determination table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is provided for determining effects to be performed in each state managed by the sub control board 400. Specifically, “production No.” and production contents corresponding to “production No.” are defined. In addition, in the effect determination table, conditions for executing effects such as a state managed by the sub control board 400 are defined.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the effect determination table includes (a) a normal state effect determination table (see FIG. 24A) used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the normal state, and ( b) A chance sign state effect determination table (see FIG. 24B) used when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is a chance sign state, and (c) the state managed by the sub control board 400. Bonus precursor state effect determination table (see FIG. 24C) used in the case of the Bonus precursor state, and (d) Chance state effect determination used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the chance state. Table (see FIG. 24D) and (e) Bo used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the Bonus ready state us preparation state effect determination table (see FIG. 24E) and (f) first Bonus state effect determination table used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the first Bonus state (FIG. 24F). )), (G) a second Bonus state effect determination table (not shown) used when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the second Bonus state, and (h) managed by the sub control board 400. The third bonus state effect determination table (not shown) used when the state is the third bonus state, and (i) the first used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the first fall standby state. A fall standby state effect determination table (not shown) and (j) when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is an ART ready state. An ART preparation state effect determination table (not shown), and (k) an ART state effect determination table (not shown) used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the ART state; ) A first added sign state effect determination table (not shown) used when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the first add sign state, and (m) the state managed by the sub control board 400. A first addition preparation state effect determination table (not shown) used in the case of the first addition preparation state, and (n) a first state used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the first addition state. An added state production determination table (not shown) and (o) a second fall standby state performance used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the second fall standby state. An outgoing decision table (not shown), and (p) a second added sign state effect determining table (not shown) used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the second added sign state; q) a second addition preparation state effect determination table (not shown) used when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the second addition preparation state, and (r) the state managed by the sub control board 400 Is the second added state effect determination table (not shown) used when the second added state is in the second added state, and (s) the third used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the third fall standby state. A fall standby state effect determination table (not shown) and (t) a fourth fall standby state effect determination table used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the fourth fall standby state. (Not shown) is provided.

(Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table)
Next, the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table includes (a) a Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table (normal state) (see FIG. 25A) for drawing whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state in the normal state. b) Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (chance precursor state) (see FIG. 25B) for drawing whether to shift to the Bonus preparation state in the chance precursor state, and (c) Bonus in the chance state. A Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table (chance state) (see FIG. 25C) for drawing whether to shift to the preparation state is provided.

(Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table (normal state))
The Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table (normal state) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is provided for lottery of whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state in the normal state. Here, in the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (normal state), a winning combination and a lottery value corresponding to the winning combination are defined. For example, when “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination, it is determined to shift to the Bonus ready state with a probability of “3276/65536”.

(Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (predicting chance state))
The Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (chance precursor state) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is provided for lottery of whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state in the chance precursor state. Here, in the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (chance precursor state), a winning combination and a lottery value corresponding to the winning combination are defined. For example, when “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination, it is determined to shift to the Bonus ready state with a probability of “3276/65536”.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (normal state) and the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (chance sign state) have the same values as the lottery values defined according to each winning combination. Although it is defined, it is not limited to this, and is defined in the lottery value defined in the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (normal state) and the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (chance precursor state). The lottery value can be set as appropriate.

(Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table (chance state))
The Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table (chance state) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is provided for drawing in the chance state whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state. Here, in the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (chance state), a winning combination and a lottery value corresponding to the winning combination are defined. For example, when “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination, it is determined to shift to the Bonus ready state with a probability of “6554/65536”.

  Here, comparing the case where a predetermined winning combination is determined in the chance state and the case where the predetermined winning combination is determined in the normal state, the case where the predetermined winning combination is determined in the chance state However, it is defined that the probability of shifting to the Bonus ready state is high. In the chance state, even when “push order bell” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to enter the bonus preparation state, while the normal state or chance In the precursor state, when “push order bell” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process to be described later, the lottery of whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state is not performed. Therefore, it can be said that the chance state has a higher probability of shifting to the Bonus ready state than the normal state or the chance precursor state.

(Bonus state distribution lottery table)
Next, the Bonus state distribution lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The Bonus state distribution lottery table includes: (a) a Bonus state distribution lottery table (normal state) (see FIG. 26A) that is referred to when it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state in the normal state. (B) Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance precursor state) (see FIG. 26 (B)) that is referred to when it is decided to shift to the Bonus ready state in the chance precursor state (see FIG. 26 (B)), and (c) chance. In the state, there is provided a Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance state) (see FIG. 26C) that is referred to when it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state.

(Bonus state distribution lottery table (normal state))
The Bonus state distribution lottery table (normal state) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and when it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state in the normal state, the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, and the third Bonus It is provided to determine any of the waiting states. Here, the Bonus state distribution lottery table (normal state) includes a lottery value determined to be waiting for the first Bonus, a lottery value determined to be waiting for the second Bonus, and a lottery value determined to be waiting for the third Bonus. It is defined for each winning role that triggered the transition to the ready state. For example, in the normal state, when “watermelon” is determined by an internal lottery process to be described later and it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state, the waiting for the first Bonus is determined with a probability of “24852/65536” The waiting for the second Bonus is determined with a probability of “39858/65536”, and the waiting for the third Bonus is determined with a probability of “826/65536”.

  In the following description, the waiting for the first Bonus, the waiting for the second Bonus, and the waiting for the third Bonus are collectively referred to as “waiting for the Bonus”.

(Bonus status distribution lottery table (predicting chance status))
The Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance precursor state) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and when it is determined to shift to the Bonus ready state in the chance precursor state, the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, It is provided to determine any of the third Bonus waiting. Here, the Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance predictor state) includes a lottery value determined to be waiting for the first Bonus, a lottery value determined to be waiting for the second Bonus, and a lottery value determined to be waiting for the third Bonus. It is defined for each winning combination that triggered the transition to the Bonus ready state. For example, when “watermelon” is determined by the internal lottery process described later in the sign of chance and it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state, the waiting for the first Bonus is determined with a probability of “24852/65536”. , Waiting for the second Bonus is determined with a probability of “39858/65536”, and waiting for the third Bonus is determined with a probability of “826/65536”.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the Bonus state distribution lottery table (normal state) and the Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance precursor state) have the same values as the lottery values defined according to each winning combination. Although defined, it is not limited to this, and is defined in the lottery values defined in the Bonus state distribution lottery table (normal state) and the Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance precursor state). The lottery value can be set as appropriate.

(Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance state))
The Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance state) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and when it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state in the chance state, the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, and the third Bonus It is provided to determine any of the waiting states. Here, the Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance state) includes a lottery value determined to be waiting for the first Bonus, a lottery value determined to be waiting for the second Bonus, and a lottery value determined to be waiting for the third Bonus. It is defined for each winning role that triggered the transition to the ready state. For example, in the chance state, when the “push order bell” is determined by the internal lottery process described later and it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state, the waiting for the first Bonus is determined with a probability of “35768/65536”. Then, waiting for the second Bonus is determined with a probability of “29749/65536”, and waiting for the third Bonus is determined with a probability of “19/65536”.

(Predictor game number determination table)
Next, the precursor game number determination table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The precursor game number determination table is (a) a Bonus precursor game number determination table for determining the number of games to be played in the Bonus precursor state when it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state (FIG. 27 ( A) see) and (b) a chance precursor game number determination table for determining the number of games to be played in the chance precursor state when it is determined to shift to the chance state in the normal state (see FIG. 27 (B)), and (c) a first number for determining the number of games to be played in the first additional sign state when it is determined to shift to the first additional state in the ART state. When the sign of the number of signs of addition sign-up (see FIG. 27C) and (d) the ART state is determined to shift to the second addition state, Allowed and a second plus aura game number determination table for determining the number of games to be able to game with aura state (see FIG. 27 (D)).

(Bonus precursor game number determination table)
The Bonus precursor game number determination table is provided in the sub ROM 402. (a) In the normal state, as a result of performing the lottery using the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (normal state) (see FIG. 25A), When it is determined to shift to the Bonus ready state, (b) in the chance precursor state, a lottery is performed using the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (chance precursor state) (see FIG. 25B). When it is determined to shift to the preparation state, it is provided to determine the number of games until the transition to the Bonus preparation state. Here, in the Bonus precursor game number determination table, a lottery value of the Bonus precursor game number is defined for each winning combination determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state. For example, when “watermelon” is determined by an internal lottery process to be described later and it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state, “5” game is determined as the number of Bonus precursor games with a probability of “49152/65536”. “10” game is determined as the number of Bonus precursor games with the probability of “8192/65536”, and “15” game is determined as the number of Bonus precursor games with the probability of “8192/65536”. The determined number of Bonus precursor games is set to the value of a Bonus precursor state game number counter, which will be described later, provided in the sub-RAM 403.

(Chance precursor game number determination table)
The chance sign game number determination table is provided in the sub ROM 402. In the normal state, as a result of lottery using a chance state shift lottery table (see FIG. 28) described later, it is determined to shift to the chance state. Is provided to determine the number of games until the chance state is entered. Here, the chance precursor game number determination table defines a lottery value of the number of chance precursor games for each winning combination determined to shift to the chance state. For example, when “watermelon” is determined by an internal lottery process described later and it is determined to shift to the chance state, “3” game is determined as the number of chance precursor games with the probability of “49152/65536” The game number “6” is determined as the chance precursor game number with the probability of “8192/65536”, and the game number “9” is determined as the chance precursor game number with the probability of “8192/65536”. The determined chance precursor game number is set to a value of a chance precursor state game number counter, which will be described later, provided in the sub-RAM 403.

(First extra sign game number determination table)
The first extra sign game number determination table is provided in the sub ROM 402. As a result of lottery using the first extra state transition lottery table (see FIG. 34A) described later in the ART state, When it is determined to shift to the added state, it is provided to determine the number of games until the shift to the first added state. Here, in the first extra sign game number determination table, a lottery value of the first extra sign game number is defined for each winning combination determined to shift to the first extra state. For example, if “watermelon” is determined by the internal lottery process described later and it is determined to shift to the first additional state, “2” game is set as the first additional harbinger game number with a probability of “32768/65536”. Is determined, and “4” games are determined as the number of first extra sign games with a probability of “32768/65536”. Note that the determined first extra sign game number is set to a value of a first extra sign state game number counter, which will be described later, provided in the sub-RAM 403.

(Second extra sign game number determination table)
The second extra sign game number determination table is provided in the sub ROM 402. As a result of lottery using the second extra state transition lottery table (see FIG. 34B) described later in the ART state, When it is determined to shift to the added state, it is provided for determining the number of games until shifting to the second added state. Here, the lottery value of the number of second extra sign game is defined for each winning combination determined to shift to the second extra state in the second extra sign game number determination table. For example, when “middle stage cherry” is determined by the internal lottery process to be described later and it is determined to shift to the second added state, “2” is set as the number of second added precursor games with a probability of “16384/65536”. The game is determined, the game number “4” is determined as the number of the second sign-on game with the probability of “16384/65536”, and the game number “6” is determined as the number of the second sign-up game with the probability of “16384/65536”. , “8” games are determined as the number of second sign-on games with the probability of “16384/65536”. It should be noted that the determined second extra sign game number is set to a value of a later-described second extra sign state game number counter provided in the sub-RAM 403.

(Chance state transition lottery table)
Next, the chance state transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The chance state transition lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 402 and is provided for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the chance state in the normal state. Specifically, in the chance state transfer lottery table, lottery values that will shift to the chance state for each winning combination are defined. For example, when “watermelon” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, it is determined to shift to the chance state with a probability of “3276/65536”.

(Fake game number determination table)
Next, the fake game number determination table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The fake game number determination table (a) in the normal state, the normal state fake game number determination table for determining the number of games in which the production is expected to shift to the Bonus preparation state (see FIG. 29A). ) And (b) in the ART state, the ART state fake game number determination table (FIG. 29 (FIG. 29)) for determining the number of games in which the production is expected to shift to the first additional state or the second additional state. B)).

(Normal Fake Game Number Determination Table)
The normal state fake game number determination table is provided in the sub ROM 402. As a result of performing lottery using the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (normal state) (see FIG. 25A) in the normal state, the bonus is determined. It is provided to determine the number of games in which an effect is expected to make a transition to the Bonus preparation state when it is not determined to enter the preparation state. Here, in the normal state fake game number determination table, a lottery value of the number of fake precursor games is defined for each winning combination. For example, if “watermelon” is determined by an internal lottery process to be described later and it is not determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state, “5” game is determined as the number of fake precursor games with a probability of “49152/65536” Then, “10” games are determined as the number of fake omens with the probability of “8192/65536”, and “15” games are determined as the number of precluded games with the probability of “8192/65536”. Note that the determined number of fake omen games is set to a value of a fake game number counter (described later) provided in the sub RAM 403.

(Art state fake game number determination table)
The ART state fake game number determination table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and in the ART state, a first added state transition lottery table (see FIG. 34A) described later and a second added state transition lottery table described later (see FIG. 34A). As a result of performing the lottery using FIG. 34 (B), when it is not determined to shift to the first added state and the second added state, the state shifts to the first added state or the second added state. It is provided to determine the number of games in which an effect that is expected to be performed is performed. Here, in the ART state fake game number determination table, a lottery value of the number of ART state fake games is defined for each winning combination. For example, if “watermelon” is determined by the internal lottery process to be described later and it is not determined to shift to the first added state and the second added state, the fake for the ART state has a probability of “49152/65536”. “1” game is determined as the number of games, “3” game is determined as the number of ART state fake precursor games with the probability of “8192/65536”, and the number of fake precursor games for ART state with the probability of “8192/65536” As a result, “5” game is determined. The determined ART state fake predictive game number is set to the value of an ART state fake game number counter, which will be described later, provided in the sub-RAM 403.

(Promotional lottery table)
Next, the promotion lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The promotion lottery table is: (a) a promotion lottery table (waiting for the first Bonus) used for lottery whether to promote during the second Bonus standby or the third Bonus standby during the first Bonus standby (FIG. 30 ( A) (refer to FIG. 30 (B)), and (b) during the second Bonus standby, the promotion lottery table (second Bonus standby) used when drawing whether or not to promote during the third Bonus standby (see FIG. 30 (B)). I have.

(Promotional lottery table (waiting for 1st Bonus))
The promotion lottery table (waiting for the first Bonus) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is promoted while waiting for the second Bonus or waiting for the third Bonus when the Bonus precursor state or the Bonus preparation state is waiting for the first Bonus. It is provided to draw whether or not to make it. Specifically, a lottery value that is promoted during the second Bonus standby and a lottery value that is promoted during the third Bonus standby are defined for each winning combination in the promotion lottery table (while waiting for the first Bonus). For example, when “weak cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the player is promoted during the second Bonus standby with a probability of “12785/65536”, and the third Bonus with a probability of “24/65536”. You will be promoted while waiting.

(Promotional lottery table (waiting for 2nd Bonus))
The promotion lottery table (waiting for the second Bonus) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and in the Bonus precursor state or the Bonus ready state, when the second Bonus is waiting, whether or not to promote during the third Bonus waiting is determined by lottery. Is provided to do. Specifically, a lottery value to be promoted during the third Bonus standby is defined for each winning combination in the promotion lottery table (while waiting for the second Bonus). For example, when “weak cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the player is promoted during the third Bonus standby with a probability of “24/65536”.

  In addition, during the first Bonus standby, when one of the symbol combinations related to “Bonus Replay” is displayed on the active line, the state shifts to the first Bonus state. Further, when any of the symbol combinations related to “Bonus Replay” is displayed on the active line while waiting for the second Bonus, the state shifts to the second Bonus state. When any of the symbol combinations related to “Bonus Replay” is displayed on the active line while waiting for the third Bonus, the state is shifted to the third Bonus state. For this reason, the waiting time for the third Bonus is most advantageous for the player compared to the waiting time for the first Bonus and the waiting time for the second Bonus. Therefore, the promotion lottery is not performed while waiting for the third Bonus.

(ART preparation state transfer lottery table)
Next, the ART preparation state transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The ART ready state transition lottery table is (a) the first Bonus state ART ready state transition lottery table used in the first Bonus state to determine whether to shift to the ART ready state (see FIG. 31A). ) And (b) a second Bonus state ART preparation state transition lottery table (see FIG. 31B) used when performing a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the ART preparation state in the second Bonus state. .

(First Bonus state ART preparation state transition lottery table)
The first Bonus state ART preparation state transition lottery table is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is provided for performing a lottery on whether or not to shift to the ART preparation state in the first Bonus state. Specifically, the lottery value for shifting to the ART ready state for each winning combination is defined in the first Bonus state ART ready state transition lottery table. For example, when “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination, it is determined to shift to the ART ready state with a probability of “4096/65536”.

(Second Bonus state ART preparation state transition lottery table)
The second Bonus state ART preparation state transition lottery table is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is provided for performing a lottery on whether or not to shift to the ART preparation state in the second Bonus state. Specifically, in the second bonus state ART ready state transition lottery table, a lottery value that shifts to the ART ready state for each winning combination is defined. For example, when “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination, it is determined to shift to the ART ready state with a probability of “8192/65536”.

(ART state number of games added lottery table)
Next, based on FIG. 32, the ART state game number addition lottery table will be described.

  The ART state number-of-games extra lottery table is: (a) In the third Bonus state, an ART state number-of-games extra lottery table (No. 1) used when performing a lottery to determine whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state. (3 Bonus state) (see FIG. 32 (A)) and (b) In the ART ready state, or in the ART state used when performing a lottery to determine whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state. The number of games added lottery table (ART ready state / ART state) (see FIG. 32B), and (c) the number of games that can be played in the ART state in the first additional sign state and the second additional sign state The number of ART state games used in the lottery to determine whether or not to be added, and a lottery table (precursor status) (see FIG. 32C), and (d) first upper In the preparation state or the second addition preparation state, the ART state number-of-games extra lottery table (addition preparation state) used when the lottery of whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state is performed (FIG. 32). (See (D)), and (e) In the first added state, an ART state number-of-games addition lottery table (first added amount) used when performing a lottery to determine whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state. (State) (see FIG. 32E) and (f) in the second added state, the number of games for the ART state used in the lottery to determine whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Table (second added state) (see FIG. 32F) and (g) used in lottery to determine whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state in the second fall standby state. Whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state in the ART state game number addition lottery table (second fall standby state) (see FIG. 32G) and (h) the third fall standby state A lottery table (third fall waiting state) (see FIG. 32 (H)) added to the number of ART state games used when the lottery is performed.

(ART state game number extra lottery table (3rd Bonus state))
The number of games for ART state addition lottery table (third Bonus state) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and after the third Bonus state ends, is the number of games that can be played in the ART state transferred through the ART ready state added? It is provided to make a lottery of no. Specifically, in the ART state game number addition lottery table (third Bonus state), a lottery value for the number of additional games is defined for each winning combination. For example, when “middle cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, “50” games are determined as the number of additional games with the probability of “32768/65536”, and “16384/65536” “100” game is determined as the number of additional games with probability, “200” game is determined as the number of additional games with probability of “8192/65536”, and “300” games as the number of additional games with probability of “8192/65536” Will be determined.

(Number of games for ART state addition lottery table (ART preparation state / ART state))
The number of games for ART state addition lottery table (ART ready state / ART state) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later in the ART ready state or ART state, It is provided for performing a lottery on whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Specifically, the lottery table for adding the number of games for ART state (ART preparation state / ART state) defines a lottery value for the number of additional games for each winning combination. For example, when “middle cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, “50” games are determined as the number of additional games with the probability of “32768/65536”, and “16384/65536” “100” game is determined as the number of additional games with probability, “200” game is determined as the number of additional games with probability of “8192/65536”, and “300” games as the number of additional games with probability of “8192/65536” Will be determined.

(Art state game number extra lottery table (precursor extra state))
The ART state number-of-games extra lottery table (preliminary sign state) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later in the first extra sign state and the second extra sign state. Thus, it is provided for performing a lottery on whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Specifically, in the ART state game number extra lottery table (preliminary sign state), the lottery value of the extra game number is defined for each winning combination. For example, when “middle cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, “50” games are determined as the number of additional games with the probability of “32768/65536”, and “16384/65536” “100” game is determined as the number of additional games with probability, “200” game is determined as the number of additional games with probability of “8192/65536”, and “300” games as the number of additional games with probability of “8192/65536” Will be determined.

(Number of games for ART state addition lottery table (addition preparation state))
The ART state number-of-games extra lottery table (upper preparation state) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later in the first extra preparation state and the second extra preparation state. Thus, it is provided for performing a lottery on whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Specifically, in the ART state game number addition lottery table (addition preparation state), a lottery value for the number of additional games is defined for each winning combination. For example, when “middle cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, “50” games are determined as the number of additional games with the probability of “32768/65536”, and “16384/65536” “100” game is determined as the number of additional games with probability, “200” game is determined as the number of additional games with probability of “8192/65536”, and “300” games as the number of additional games with probability of “8192/65536” Will be determined.

(ART state game number extra lottery table (first extra state))
The number-of-arts game extra lottery table (first extra state) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and in the first extra state, games can be played in the ART state based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later. It is provided for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to increase the number of games. Specifically, in the ART state game number extra lottery table (first extra state), the lottery value of the extra game number is defined for each winning combination. For example, when “middle stage cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, “100” game is determined as the number of additional games with the probability of “32768/65536”, and “16384/65536” The “200” game is determined as the number of additional games with probability, and the “300” game is determined as the number of additional games with the probability of “16384/65536”.

(ART state game number extra lottery table (second extra state))
The ART state game number extra lottery table (second extra state) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and in the second extra state, it is possible to play in the ART state based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later. It is provided for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to increase the number of games. Specifically, in the ART state game number extra lottery table (second extra state), the lottery value of the extra game number is defined for each winning combination. For example, when “middle stage cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, “100” game is determined as the number of additional games with the probability of “16384/65536”, and “16384/65536” The “200” game is determined as the number of additional games by the probability, and the “300” game is determined as the additional number of games at the probability of “32768/65536”.

(ART state number of games added lottery table (second fall standby state))
The number of games for ART state addition lottery table (second fall standby state) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and in the ART state based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later in the second fall standby state. It is provided for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played. Specifically, in the ART state game number addition lottery table (second fall standby state), a lottery value for the number of additional games is defined for each winning combination. For example, when “middle cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, “50” games are determined as the number of additional games with the probability of “32768/65536”, and “16384/65536” “100” game is determined as the number of additional games with probability, “200” game is determined as the number of additional games with probability of “8192/65536”, and “300” games as the number of additional games with probability of “8192/65536” Will be determined.

(ART state number of games added lottery table (third fall standby state))
The number of games for ART state addition lottery table (third fall standby state) is provided in the sub ROM 402. In the third fall standby state, in the ART state based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later. It is provided for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played. Specifically, in the ART state game number addition lottery table (third fall standby state), a lottery value for the number of additional games is defined for each winning combination. For example, when “middle cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, “50” games are determined as the number of additional games with the probability of “32768/65536”, and “16384/65536” “100” game is determined as the number of additional games with probability, “200” game is determined as the number of additional games with probability of “8192/65536”, and “300” games as the number of additional games with probability of “8192/65536” Will be determined.

(Withdrawal lottery table)
Next, the pull-back lottery table will be described based on FIG.

  The pull-back lottery table is (a) a first lottery standby state pull-out lottery table (see FIG. 33A) that is used when performing a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the ART ready state in the first roll-down standby state. ) And (b) in the fourth fall standby state, a fourth fall standby state pull-out lottery table (see FIG. 33 (B)) used when performing a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the ART state is provided. Yes.

(Retraction lottery table for the first fall standby state)
The first fall standby state pull-out lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is provided for performing a lottery on whether or not to shift to the ART preparation state in the first fall standby state. Specifically, in the first fall standby state withdrawal lottery table, a lottery value that will shift to the ART ready state is defined for each winning combination. For example, when “successful play” is determined as the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, it is determined to shift to the ART preparation state with a probability of “4096/65536”.

(Fourth lottery table for the 4th falling standby state)
The fourth fall standby state pull-out lottery table is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is provided for performing a lottery on whether or not to shift to the ART state in the fourth fall standby state. Specifically, in the fourth falling standby state withdrawal lottery table, a lottery value that will shift to the ART state is defined for each winning combination. For example, when “successful play” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, it is determined to shift to the ART state with a probability of “8192/65536”.

(Additional state transfer lottery table)
Next, the added state transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The added state transition lottery table includes (a) a first added state transition lottery table (see FIG. 34 (A)) used when performing a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the first added state, and (b) second. A second added state transition lottery table (see FIG. 34B) used when performing a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the added state is provided.

(First addition state transition lottery table)
The first added state transition lottery table is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is provided for performing a lottery on whether or not to shift to the first added state in the ART state. Specifically, in the first added state transition lottery table, a lottery value that will shift to the first added state is defined for each winning combination. For example, when “strong cherry” is determined as the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, it is determined to shift to the first added state with a probability of “8192/65536”.

(Second addition state transition lottery table)
The second added state transition lottery table is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is provided for performing a lottery on whether or not to shift to the second added state in the ART state. Specifically, in the second added state transition lottery table, a lottery value that will shift to the second added state is defined for each winning combination. For example, when “middle stage cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, it is determined to shift to the second added state with a probability of “32768/65536”.

(Program start processing by the main control board 300)
Next, the program start process performed by the main control board 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The program start process is a process performed based on the fact that the power switch 201sw is turned on.

(Step S1)
In step S <b> 1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not power is interrupted. Specifically, when power is supplied to the gaming machine 1, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the gaming machine 1 is in a power interruption state, and when the power is not supplied to the gaming machine 1. In this case, a process for determining whether or not the gaming machine 1 is cut off by the backup power source is performed. If it is determined that the power is interrupted (step S1 = Yes), the process of step S1 is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the power is not interrupted (step S1 = No), the process proceeds to step S2.

(Step S2)
In step S2, the main CPU 301 performs an initial setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets a table address for setting the internal register of the gaming machine 1, and performs a process of setting the register address based on the table. Then, when the process of step S2 ends, the process proceeds to step S3.

(Step S3)
In step S3, the main CPU 301 performs a RAM checksum calculation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 calculates the checksum of the main RAM 303, and when the calculation is completed, performs processing for setting the checksum of the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S3 ends, the process proceeds to step S4.

(Step S4)
In step S4, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not the setting change key switch is ON. In the present embodiment, the setting change key switch 49sw is turned on when the setting change key (not shown) is inserted into the setting change key hole 48 and rotated by a predetermined angle. Therefore, in step S4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the setting change key (not shown) is rotated by a predetermined angle with the setting change key inserted in the setting change key hole 48. When it is determined that the setting change key switch is ON (step S4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S5, and when it is determined that the setting change key switch is OFF (step S4). = No), the processing shifts to a power failure recovery process for restoring the value of the register saved before power interruption and the value of the saved stack pointer.

  When the power interruption recovery process is completed, the game machine 1 returns to the state when the power is turned off.

(Step S5)
In step S5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the door opening / closing sensor is ON. In the present embodiment, a door key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole 5 and rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle, and the front door 3 is opened by a predetermined angle or more, whereby the door opening / closing sensor 17s is turned on. It becomes. Therefore, in step S5, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not a door key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole 5 and rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle, and the front door 3 is opened at a predetermined angle or more. Processing to determine is performed. If it is determined that the door opening / closing sensor is ON (step S5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S7, and if it is determined that the door opening / closing sensor is OFF (step S5 = No). ), The process proceeds to step S6.

(Step S6)
In step S6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a setting change device operation abnormality flag. Specifically, when the setting change key switch 49sw is ON (step S4 = Yes) and the door opening / closing sensor 17s is OFF (step S5 = No), the front door 3 is not opened more than a predetermined angle. Nevertheless, it is rotated by a predetermined angle with the setting change key inserted. For this reason, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a setting change device operation abnormality flag in a setting change device operation abnormality flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. And when the process of step S6 is complete | finished, a process is transfered to the electric power interruption return process mentioned above.

(Step S7)
In step S7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a setting change start command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the setting change start command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the setting change start command to the sub-control board 400. I do. Here, the “setting change start command” is a command having information or the like indicating that the gaming machine 1 is turned on and starts changing the setting value. Then, when the process of step S7 ends, the process proceeds to step S8.

(Step S8)
In step S8, the main CPU 301 performs a setting value change process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 acquires the current set value, determines whether or not the range of the set value is normal, and when the determination result is normal, the stored number indicator 28, Processing for displaying the current set value on the setting display unit 44 is performed. On the other hand, when the above determination result is not normal, processing for setting the initial setting value of the setting value in the setting value storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. The main CPU 301 performs a setting value switching process based on the detection of the operation of the setting change button 45 by the setting change switch 45sw, and also detects that the operation of the start lever 10 is detected by the start switch 10sw. Based on this, the setting value is determined, and the setting value is stored in the main RAM 303 when it is detected that the setting changing key rotated by a predetermined angle has been rotated to an angle at which it can be inserted and removed. Processing to store in the set value storage area provided is performed. Then, when the process of step S8 ends, the process proceeds to step S9.

(Step S9)
In step S9, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a setting change end command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the setting change end command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the setting change end command to the sub-control board 400. I do. Here, the “setting change end command” is a command having information indicating that the setting value has been changed and information related to the changed setting value. Then, when the process of step S9 ends, the process proceeds to step S10.

(Step S10)
In step S10, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the door opening / closing sensor is OFF. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the door opening / closing sensor 17s is OFF. If it is determined that the door opening / closing sensor is OFF (step S10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S11, and if it is determined that the door opening / closing sensor is not OFF (step S10 = No). ), The process proceeds to step S12.

(Step S11)
In step S11, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a door close command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the door close command in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the door close command to the sub-control board 400. . Here, the “door close command” is a command having information indicating that the front door 3 is closed. Then, when the process of step S11 ends, the process proceeds to the main loop process (see FIG. 36).

(Step S12)
In step S12, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a door open command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the door open command in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the door open command to the sub-control board 400. . Here, the “door open command” is a command having information indicating that the front door 3 is open. Then, when the process of step S12 ends, the process proceeds to the main loop process (see FIG. 36).

(Main loop processing by the main control board 300)
Next, the main loop process performed by the main control board 300 will be described with reference to FIG.

(Step S101)
In step S101, the main CPU 301 performs an initialization process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the stack pointer, sets the initialization start address and the initialization end address of the main RAM 303, and then initializes from the initialization start address to the initialization end address area of the main RAM 303. Processing for initializing the area is performed. Then, when the process of step S101 ends, the process proceeds to step S102.

(Step S102)
In step S102, the main CPU 301 performs a game start management process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303, the value of the stop control number storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and the press reference position storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Performs processing to clear the value. Further, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the operable state flag corresponding to the BET button 7 and the MAXBET button 8 in the operable state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S102 ends, the process proceeds to step S103.

(Step S103)
In step S103, the main CPU 301 performs medal acceptance start processing. In this processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing for automatically inserting medals when a later-described re-game operation flag is ON. Then, when the process of step S103 ends, the process proceeds to step S104.

(Step S104)
In step S104, the main CPU 301 performs a setting value confirmation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the setting value stored in the setting value storage area provided in the main RAM 303 when the medal has not been inserted and the setting change key switch 49sw is ON. A process of displaying the value on the setting display unit 44 is performed. Then, when the process of step S104 ends, the process proceeds to step S105.

(Step S105)
In step S105, the main CPU 301 performs medal management processing. In this process, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not a medal is inserted into the medal slot 6 when a later-described re-game operation flag is not ON, and when a medal is inserted into the medal slot 6, Processing to add the value of the inserted number counter provided in the main RAM 303, whether or not the operation of the BET button 7 or the MAXBET button 8 is detected, and the operation of the BET button 7 or the MAXBET button 8 is detected. If it is determined, whether or not the processing of adding the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303, the operation of the settlement button 9 is detected, and the operation of the settlement button 9 is detected, the storage is performed. Processing to return the medal that has been made to the player is performed. Then, when the process of step S105 ends, the process proceeds to step S106.

(Step S106)
In step S <b> 106, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the insertion number counter is “3”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 has become “3” by the medal acceptance start process in step S103 and the medal management process in step S105. Process. If it is determined that the value of the inserted number counter is “3” (step S106 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S107, and it is determined that the value of the inserted number counter is not “3”. In that case (step S106 = No), the process proceeds to step S104.

(Step S107)
In step S107, the main CPU 301 performs a start lever check process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the start switch 10sw is ON. Then, when the process of step S107 ends, the process proceeds to step S108.

(Step S108)
In step S108, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not the start switch is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the start switch 10sw is ON. If it is determined that the start switch is ON (step S108 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109. If it is determined that the start switch is not ON (step S108 = No), The process proceeds to step S104.

(Step S109)
In step S109, the main CPU 301 performs an internal lottery process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining a winning combination by lottery. Then, when the process of step S109 ends, the process proceeds to step S110.

(Step S110)
In step S110, the main CPU 301 performs a symbol code setting process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring a stop control number based on the winning combination determined in the process of step S109 and storing it in a stop control number storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110 ends, the process proceeds to step S111.

(Step S111)
In step S111, the main CPU 301 performs a reel rotation start preparation process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process for setting a minimum game time. Then, when the process of step S111 ends, the process proceeds to step S112.

(Step S112)
In step S112, the main CPU 301 performs reel stop pre-processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a pull-in prediction process for the rotating left reel 18, middle reel 19, and right reel 20. Then, when the process of step S112 ends, the process proceeds to step S113.

(Step S113)
In step S113, the main CPU 301 performs a reel rotation flag setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information indicating that the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotating in a reel information storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S113 ends, the process proceeds to step S114.

(Step S114)
In step S114, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the operable state flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing to turn off the operable state flag corresponding to the BET button 7 or the MAXBET button 8 in the operable state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S114 ends, the process proceeds to step S115.

(Step S115)
In step S115, the main CPU 301 performs a reel rotation start process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 drives the left stepping motor 151, the middle stepping motor 152, and the right stepping motor 153 via the reel control board 150 to determine the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. Performs processing to rotate at high speed. Then, when the process of step S115 ends, the process proceeds to step S116.

(Step S116)
In step S116, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an operable state flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the operable state flag corresponding to the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 in the operable state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Do. Then, when the process of step S116 ends, the process proceeds to step S117.

(Step S117)
In step S117, the main CPU 301 performs reel rotation processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 detects that the left stop switch 11sw, middle stop switch 12sw, and right stop switch 13sw have detected a stop operation on the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 by the player. Then, processing for stopping the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is performed. Then, when the process of step S117 ends, the process proceeds to step S118.

(Step S118)
In step S118, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not all reels have stopped. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether all of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 have stopped based on the value of the operable state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. I do. If it is determined that all the reels are stopped (step S118 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119. If it is determined that all the reels are not stopped (step S118 = No), The process proceeds to step S117, and the same process is repeated until all reels stop.

(Step S119)
In step S119, the main CPU 301 performs display determination processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of calculating the number of payouts according to the winning symbol combination. Then, when the process of step S119 ends, the process proceeds to step S120.

(Step S120)
In step S120, the main CPU 301 performs a payout process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of paying out medals by driving the hopper 202 via the power supply board 200 based on the combination of symbols related to “winning” being displayed on the active line. Do. Then, when the process of step S120 ends, the process proceeds to step S121.

(Step S121)
In step S121, the main CPU 301 performs a game state transition process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of shifting the RT gaming state based on the combination of symbols displayed on the active line. Then, when the process of step S121 ends, the process proceeds to step S101, and the main loop process is repeatedly executed.

(Start lever check processing)
Next, based on FIG. 37, the start lever check process performed by the process of step S107 of FIG. 36 will be described. FIG. 37 shows a subroutine of the start lever check process.

(Step S107-1)
In step S107-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the start switch is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the start switch 10sw has detected an operation of the start lever 10 by the player. When it is determined that the start switch is ON (step S107-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S107-2, and when it is determined that the start switch is not ON (step S107). −1 = No), the start lever check processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S108 of the main loop processing.

(Step S107-2)
In step S107-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the re-game operation flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the value of the re-game operation flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S107-2 ends, the start lever check process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S108 of the main loop process.

(Internal lottery process)
Next, the internal lottery process performed by the process of step S109 of FIG. 36 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the internal lottery process.

(Step S109-1)
In step S109-1, the main CPU 301 performs a pre-lottery error check process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of detecting an error before determining the winning combination by the internal lottery process. Then, when the process of step S109-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-2.

  The main CPU 301 performs a non-recoverable error process when an error is detected by the pre-lottery error check process in step S109-1.

(Step S109-2)
In step S109-2, the main CPU 301 performs a hard random number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for extracting the random number value generated by the main random number generator 304 and processing for storing the extracted random number value in a register. Then, when the process of step S109-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-3.

(Step S109-3)
In step S109-3, the main CPU 301 performs a winning number initial value acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for obtaining an initial value of a winning number when determining a winning combination. Here, in this embodiment, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring “39” as the initial value of the winning number and storing it in the register. Then, when the process of step S109-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4.

(Step S109-4)
In step S109-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the second winning combination determination table. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a second winning combination determination table (see FIG. 20) stored in the main ROM 302. Then, when the process of step S109-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-5.

(Step S109-5)
In step S109-5, the main CPU 301 performs a winning number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a winning number stored in the register. Then, when the process of step S109-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-6.

(Step S109-6)
In step S109-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning number is “24” or more. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning number acquired by the winning number acquiring process in step S109-5 is “24” or more. If it is determined that the winning number is “24” or more (step S109-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-11, and it is determined that the winning number is not “24” or more. In this case (step S109-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-7.

(Step S109-7)
In step S109-7, the main CPU 301 performs a gaming state acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a gaming state based on the value of the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-8.

(Step S109-8)
In step S109-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the first winning combination determination table. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the first winning combination determination table in accordance with the gaming state acquired by the gaming state acquisition processing in step S109-7. For example, when the gaming state acquired by the gaming state acquisition processing in step S109-7 is the first RT gaming state, processing for setting the first winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state (see FIG. 14) is performed. . Then, when the process of step S109-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-9.

(Step S109-9)
In step S109-9, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery data acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 obtains data related to the winning combination corresponding to the winning number based on the first winning combination determining table set by the process of step S109-8 and the winning number stored in the register. Perform the acquisition process. Then, when the process of step S109-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-10.

(Step S109-10)
In step S109-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not there is a lottery. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not to perform the lottery based on the data relating to the winning combination acquired by the lottery data acquisition process of step S109-9. Here, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 determines that the lottery is not performed when the lottery value corresponding to the winning number is “0”. When it is determined that there is no lottery (step S109-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-16, and when it is determined that there is no lottery (step S109-10 = No). ), The process proceeds to step S109-11.

(Step S109-11)
In step S <b> 109-11, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not the setting is a common value for all settings. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning number acquired by the lottery data acquisition process in step S109-9 is the same lottery value regardless of the set value. If it is determined that the value is a common value for all settings (step S109-11 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-13, and if it is determined that the value is not a common value for all settings (step S109). −11 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-12.

(Step S109-12)
In step S109-12, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery value acquisition process by setting value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the first winning combination currently set based on the value stored in the set value storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and the winning number stored in the register. The lottery value of the table or the second winning combination determination table is acquired and stored in the register. Then, when the process of step S109-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-14.

(Step S109-13)
In step S109-13, the main CPU 301 performs all setting common lottery value acquisition processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 acquires a lottery value of the first winning combination determination table or the second winning combination determination table that is currently set based on the winning number stored in the register, and stores it in the register. Perform the process. Then, when the process of step S109-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-14.

(Step S109-14)
In step S109-14, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery confirmation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the lottery value acquired by the lottery value acquisition process by setting value in step S109-12 from the random value stored in the register, or the all setting common lottery value acquisition process in step S109-13. The lottery value acquired by the above is subtracted, and the value of the register in which the random value is stored is updated to the value after the subtraction and stored. Then, when the process of step S109-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-15.

(Step S109-15)
In step S109-15, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the lottery value acquired by the lottery value acquisition process by setting value of step S109-12 from the random number value stored in the register by the lottery confirmation process of step S109-14, or step S109-13. As a result of performing the process of subtracting the lottery value acquired by the all setting common lottery value acquisition process, a process of determining whether or not a negative value has been obtained is performed. If it is determined that the winning is made (step S109-15 = Yes), the subroutine of the internal lottery process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning is not made (step S109-15 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-16.

  If it is determined that the winning combination has been won (step S109-15 = Yes), the winning combination corresponding to the winning number stored in the register is determined.

(Step S109-16)
In step S109-16, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the winning number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the winning number stored in the register. Then, when the process of step S109-16 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-17.

(Step S109-17)
In step S109-17, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the winning number is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the winning number is “0” as a result of subtracting “1” from the winning number value stored in the register by the process of step S109-16. Perform the process. If it is determined that the value of the winning number is “0” (step S109-17 = Yes), the internal lottery process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the winning number is not “0” (step S109-17 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4.

  In the present embodiment, when the value of the winning number is “0” (step S109-17 = YES), “losing” is determined as the winning combination.

(Design code setting process)
Next, the symbol code setting process performed by the process of step S110 of FIG. 36 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 39 shows a subroutine of symbol code setting processing.

(Step S110-1)
In step S110-1, the main CPU 301 performs a stop control number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 stores the winning number of the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process in step S109 as a stop control number in a stop control number storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and sets it in a register. Process. Then, when the process of step S110-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-2.

(Step S110-2)
In step S110-2, the main CPU 301 performs a display permission symbol bit setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is a display permission that is information related to a combination of symbols that is allowed to be displayed on the active line based on the stop control number acquired by the stop control number acquisition process in step S110-1. Performs processing to set symbol bits. Then, when the process of step S110-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-3.

(Step S110-3)
In step S110-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a reel rotation start acceptance command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the reel rotation start acceptance command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the reel rotation start acceptance command to the sub-control board 400. Perform the process. Here, the “reel rotation start acceptance command” is a command having information indicating that the operation of the start lever 10 has been accepted. Then, when the process of step S110-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-4.

(Step S110-4)
In step S110-4, the main CPU 301 performs a spinning effect lottery process. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery process to determine whether or not to perform a spinning effect to rotate the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. If the lottery is won, The process which stores the information which concerns on the winning rotation effect information is performed in the rotation effect information storage area currently set. Then, when the process of step S110-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-5.

(Step S110-5)
In step S110-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a conditional device command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the conditional device command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the conditional device command to the sub-control board 400. . Here, the “condition device command” is a command having information related to the winning combination, information related to the spinning effect to be executed, and the like. When the process of step S110-5 ends, the symbol code setting process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S111 of the main loop process.

(Reel rotation start preparation process)
Next, the reel rotation start preparation process performed by the process of step S111 of FIG. 36 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 40 shows a subroutine for reel rotation start preparation processing.

(Step S111-1)
In step S111-1, the main CPU 301 performs a turning effect setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information for executing the spinning effect based on the information stored in the spinning effect information storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and A process for executing the trunk effect is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-2.

(Step S111-2)
In step S111-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the timer counter set by the process of step S111-3 described later has become “0” in the previous game. If it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed (step S111-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-3, and if it is determined that the minimum game time has not elapsed ( Step S111-2 = No), the process of step S111-2 is repeatedly executed until the minimum game time has elapsed.

(Step S111-3)
In step S111-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a minimum game time. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is configured so that the time from the process of step S111-3 in the previous game to the process of step S111-2 in the current game is not less than the minimum game time in order to suppress gambling for the game. Then, a process for setting the minimum game time in the timer counter is performed. Here, in the present embodiment, the minimum game time is about “4.1” seconds. Then, when the process of step S111-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4.

(Step S111-4)
In step S111-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a reel rotation start command. Specifically, in order for the main CPU 301 to transmit a reel rotation start command to the sub-control board 400, a process of setting the reel rotation start command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303 is performed. Here, the reel rotation start command is a command having information indicating that rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is started. When the process of step S111-4 is completed, the reel rotation start preparation process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Reel stop pretreatment)
Next, based on FIG. 41, the reel stop pre-process performed by the process of step S112 of FIG. 36 will be described. FIG. 41 shows a subroutine for reel stop pre-processing.

(Step S112-1)
In step S112-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting an expected pull-in reel search initial value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting data “100B” corresponding to the right reel 20 in the register as an expected pull-in reel search initial value. Then, when the process of step S112-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S112-2.

(Step S112-2)
In step S112-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the reel is rotating. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the left to be searched based on the pull-in expected reel search initial value set in the process of step S112-1 or the value of the search target reel updated in step S112-4 described later. A process of determining whether or not the reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotating is performed. If it is determined that the reel is rotating (step S112-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S112-3. If it is determined that the reel is not rotating (step S112- 2 = No), the process proceeds to step S112-4.

(Step S112-3)
In step S112-3, the main CPU 301 performs a pull-in prediction process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 first sets the initial value of the virtual stop position, acquires the pull-in priority according to the virtual stop position, and stores it in the pull-in priority storage area provided in the main RAM 303. I do. Then, when the process of step S112-3 is completed, the process proceeds to step S112-4.

  The main CPU 301 performs a process of clearing data stored in the pull-in priority storage area provided in the main RAM 303 at a predetermined timing by the pull-in prediction process in step S112-3.

(Step S112-4)
In step S112-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the next search target reel. Specifically, when it is determined that the search target reel is stopped (step S112-2 = No), the main CPU 301 performs the search target reel pull-in prediction process in the pull-in prediction process in step S112-3. When the processing is completed, the value set in the register is shifted to the right to obtain the next search target reel. Then, when the process of step S112-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S112-5.

(Step S112-5)
In step S112-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the processing of all reels has been completed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the pull-in prediction process for all of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 has been completed. If it is determined that all reels have been processed (step S112-5 = Yes), the reel stop pre-processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S113 of the main loop process. On the other hand, if it is determined that all reels have not been processed (step S112-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S112-2, and all of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are processed. The same process is repeatedly executed until the pull-in prediction process for the reel is completed.

(Processing during reel rotation)
Next, based on FIG. 42, the reel rotation process performed by the process of step S117 of FIG. 36 will be described. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing during reel rotation.

(Step S117-1)
In step S117-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the stop button is being pressed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the left stop switch 11sw, middle stop switch 12sw, and right stop switch 13sw have detected an operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 by the player. Processing to determine is performed. If it is determined that the stop button has been pressed (step S117-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-2, and if it is determined that the stop button has not been pressed (step S117). -1 = No), the reel rotation process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S118 of the main loop process.

(Step S117-2)
In step S117-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the operable state flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the left stop button 11 in the operable state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 based on the operated left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, and right stop button 13. Processing to turn off the operable flag corresponding to the stop button 12 and the right stop button 13 is performed. Then, when the process of step S117-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-3.

(Step S117-3)
In step S117-3, the main CPU 301 performs a pressing information storing process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 includes the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, the right reel 20 and the left stepping motor corresponding to the operated stop button among the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. 151, based on the values of the pulse counters supplied to the middle stepping motor 152 and the right stepping motor 153, a process of acquiring the pressing reference position and storing it in the pressing reference position storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S117-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-4.

(Step S117-4)
In step S117-4, the main CPU 301 performs a sliding frame number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 includes a sliding frame number determination table (not shown) provided in the main ROM 302, the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process, the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right Based on the operation order of the stop button 13 and the like, a process of acquiring the number of sliding frames is performed. Here, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining the number of sliding frames within the range of “0” frames to “4” frames as the number of sliding frames. Then, when the process of step S117-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-5.

(Step S117-5)
In step S117-5, the main CPU 301 performs a reel stop process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 removes the reel based on the pressing reference position stored by the pressing information storing process in step S117-3 and the sliding frame number acquired by the sliding frame number acquisition process in step S117-4. Process to stop. Then, when the process of step S117-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-6.

(Step S117-6)
In step S117-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a reel stop command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the reel stop command in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the reel stop command to the sub-control board 400. . Here, the “reel stop command” is a command having information such as a pressing reference position and the number of sliding frames. When the process of step S117-6 is completed, the subroutine for the reel rotation process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S118 of the main loop process.

(Display judgment processing)
Next, the display determination process performed by the process of step S119 of FIG. 36 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a subroutine of display determination processing.

(Step S119-1)
In step S119-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a display determination command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the display determination command in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the display determination command to the sub-control board 400. . Here, the “display determination command” is a command having information on a combination of symbols displayed on the active line. Then, when the process of step S119-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-2.

(Step S119-2)
In step S119-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a blank is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the symbol combination related to “blank” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that a blank is displayed (step S119-2 = Yes), the display determination process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S120 of the main loop process. On the other hand, if it is determined that no blank is displayed (step S119-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-3.

(Step S119-3)
In step S119-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a winning is achieved. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the symbol combination related to “winning” is displayed on the active line. When it is determined that a winning is achieved (step S119-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-4, and when it is determined that a winning is not achieved (step S119-3). = No), the process proceeds to step S119-5.

(Step S119-4)
In step S119-4, the main CPU 301 performs a payout number calculation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of calculating the number of payouts based on the combination of symbols related to “winning” displayed on the active line. When the process of step S119-4 ends, the display determination process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S120 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-5)
In step S119-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not replay is established. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a symbol combination related to “replay” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that replay has been established (step S119-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-6, and if it is determined that replay has not been established (step S119-5). = No), the display determination process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S120 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-6)
In step S119-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the re-game operation flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the value of the re-game operation flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S119-6 ends, the display determination process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S120 of the main loop process.

(Game state transition process)
Next, based on FIG. 44, the game state transition process performed by the process of step S121 of FIG. 36 will be described. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the game state transition process.

(Step S121-1)
In step S121-1, the main CPU 301 performs RT gaming state transition processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of shifting the RT game state based on the current game state and the combination of symbols displayed on the active line. Then, when the process of step S121-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S121-2.

(Step S121-2)
In step S121-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a game end command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the game end command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the game end command to the sub-control board 400. . Here, the “game end command” is a command having information that the game has ended, information related to the game state, and the like. When the process of step S121-2 ends, the game state transition process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(RT gaming state transition processing)
Next, based on FIG. 45, the RT gaming state transition process performed by the process of step S121-1 of FIG. 44 will be described. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a subroutine of RT gaming state transition processing.

(Step S121-1-1)
In step S121-1-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a game state transition symbol is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines a combination of symbols related to “blank”, a combination of symbols related to “preparation replay”, a combination of symbols related to “Bonus replay”, a combination of symbols related to “ART replay”, Among the symbol combinations related to “Replay” or the symbol combinations related to “RUSH Replay”, processing is performed to determine whether any symbol combination is displayed on the active line. When the game state transition symbol is displayed (step S121-1-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-1-2, and it is determined that the game state transition symbol is not displayed. (Step S121-1-1 = No), the RT game state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to Step S121-2 of the game state transition process.

(Step S121-1-2)
In step S121-1-2, the main CPU 301 performs a gaming state acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a gaming state based on the value of the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S121-1-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S121-1-3.

(Step S121-1-3)
In step S121-1-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a game state transition time. Specifically, as shown in the game state transition diagram (see FIG. 21), the main CPU 301 performs step S121-1- when, for example, a combination of symbols related to “blank” is displayed in the non-RT game state. Based on the combination of the gaming state acquired by the gaming state acquisition processing of No. 2 and the symbols displayed on the active line, processing for determining whether or not the gaming state is being shifted is performed. If it is determined that the game state is being changed (step S121-1-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-1-4, and if it is determined that the game state is not being changed. (Step S121-1-3 = No), the RT game state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to Step S121-2 of the game state transition process.

(Step S121-1-4)
In step S121-1-4, the main CPU 301 performs a gaming state setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the gaming state provided in the main RAM 303 based on the combination of the gaming state acquired by the gaming state acquisition process in step S121-1-2 and the symbols displayed on the active line. Processing to update the value of the storage area is performed. When the process of step S121-1-4 is completed, the RT gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S121-2 of the gaming state transition process.

(Interrupt processing)
Next, interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the interrupt process is a process performed by interrupting the main loop process every “1.49 ms”.

(Step S201)
In step S <b> 201, the main CPU 301 performs processing for saving a register. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for saving the value of the register used at the time of step S201. Then, when the process of step S201 ends, the process proceeds to step S202.

(Step S202)
In step S202, the main CPU 301 performs input port read processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for receiving predetermined signals from the status board 100, the reel control board 150, the power supply board 200, and the setting switch board 250. Then, when the process of step S202 ends, the process proceeds to step S203.

(Step S203)
In step S203, the main CPU 301 performs an external signal output data set process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting output port data of the external concentrated terminal board 47 when there is an output request for an external signal related to an error. Then, when the process of step S203 ends, the process proceeds to step S204.

(Step S204)
In step S204, the main CPU 301 performs a timer measurement process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the timer for effect at the time of the spinning effect and the value of the timer counter for measuring the minimum game time and the like. Then, when the process of step S204 ends, the process proceeds to step S205.

(Step S205)
In step S205, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “3” as the reel number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “3” as the reel number in order to set the target of the reel to be driven and controlled in the reel drive control process of step S206 described later. Then, when the process of step S205 ends, the process proceeds to step S206.

(Step S206)
In step S206, the main CPU 301 performs a reel drive control process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 via the reel control board 150, the reel number set by the process of step S205 or the left reel 18 corresponding to the reel number set by the process of step S207 described later, By driving the left stepping motor 151, the middle stepping motor 152, and the right stepping motor 153 of the reel 19, the right reel 20, rotation acceleration, constant speed, deceleration control, etc. of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are controlled. Do. Then, when the process of step S206 ends, the process proceeds to step S207.

  In this embodiment, the main CPU 301 performs drive control of the right reel 20 when the reel number is “3”, and performs drive control of the middle reel 19 when the reel number is “2”. When the reel number is “1”, drive control of the left reel 18 is performed.

(Step S207)
In step S207, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the reel number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the reel number currently set in the register. Then, when the process of step S207 ends, the process proceeds to step S208.

(Step S208)
In step S208, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the reel number is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the reel drive control process of step S206 has been performed for all the reels of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. When it is determined that the reel number is “0” (step S208 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S209, and when it is determined that the reel number is not “0” (step S208). = No), the process proceeds to step S206.

(Step S209)
In step S209, the main CPU 301 performs an external signal output process. In this processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting output port data of the external concentration terminal board 47 and the like. Then, when the process of step S209 ends, the process proceeds to step S210.

(Step S210)
In step S210, the main CPU 301 performs LED output data creation processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 includes a start lamp 24, a first BET lamp 25, a second BET lamp 26, a third BET lamp 27, a stored number display 28, a payout number display 29, a throwable display lamp 30, and a replay display. Processing for creating display data of the lamp 31 is performed. Then, when the process of step S210 ends, the process proceeds to step S211.

  The main CPU 301 controls to turn on a re-game display lamp lighting flag provided in the main RAM 303 when creating display data for lighting the re-game display lamp 31 in the LED output data creation processing in step S210. When the display data for turning off the re-game display lamp 31 is created, the re-game display lamp lighting flag provided in the main RAM 303 is turned off.

(Step S211)
In step S211, the main CPU 301 performs an LED display process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 includes a start lamp 24, a first BET lamp 25, a second BET lamp 26, a third BET lamp 27, a stored number display 28, a payout number display 29, a throwable display lamp 30, and a replay display. The lamp 31 is controlled. Then, when the process of step S211 is completed, the process proceeds to step S212.

(Step S212)
In step S212, the main CPU 301 performs control command transmission processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for transmitting various commands set in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 to the sub-control board 400. Then, when the process of step S212 ends, the process proceeds to step S213.

(Step S213)
In step S213, the main CPU 301 performs port output processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of transmitting a predetermined signal to the status board 100, the reel control board 150, the power supply board 200, and the sub control board 400. Then, when the process of step S213 ends, the process proceeds to step S214.

(Step S214)
In step S214, the main CPU 301 performs a register restoration process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of restoring the saved register value in the process of step S201. Then, when the process of step S214 ends, the interrupt process ends, and the process returns to the main loop process.

(Main processing on sub-control board)
Next, the main process in the sub control board will be described with reference to FIG.

(Step S301)
In step S301, the sub CPU 401 performs an initialization process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing such as error checking of the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S301 ends, the process proceeds to step S302.

(Step S302)
In step S302, the sub CPU 401 performs main board communication processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for analyzing a command transmitted from the main control board 300 and the like. Then, when the process of step S302 ends, the process proceeds to step S303.

(Step S303)
In step S303, the sub CPU 401 performs sound control processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs specific detection that triggers the output of a system sound described later (a sound in which the sub CPU 401 directly transmits an audio data output designation command to the liquid crystal control CPU 601 and the sound source IC 605 or the like performs audio output). When a command indicating a result (for example, detection of an error or an operation related to a game such as a lever operation) is received from the main control board 300, audio data to be output in accordance with the detection result is specified, An audio data output designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 600. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of transmitting an effect designation command to the effect control board 600 based on the effect content determined by the sub effect determining process described later. The effect control board 600 is controlled by the liquid crystal control CPU 601 and the sound source IC 605 according to the command transmitted by the sub CPU 401 and the amplifier board 500 via the upper left speaker 40, the lower left speaker 41, the upper right speaker 42, and the lower right speaker. A process of outputting sound from the speaker 43 is performed. Processing by the liquid crystal control CPU 601 of the effect control board 600 will be described later. Then, when the process of step S303 ends, the process proceeds to step S304.

(Step S304)
In step S304, the sub CPU 401 performs lamp control processing. For example, the sub CPU 401 displays the Bonus display unit 32, the ART display unit 33, the RUSH display unit 34, and the stop button operation display via the panel LED relay board 700 based on the content of the effect determined by the sub effect determination process described later. The unit 35, the start lever LED 36, the MAXBET button LED 721, the stop button LED 722, the effect button LED 723, and the waist panel LED 724 are controlled. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs the effect device 50, the left effect device motor 651, and the right effect device via the effect control board 600 and the effect device drive board 650, based on the effect contents determined by the sub effect determination process described later. The motor 654, the left liquid crystal lift motor 657, and the right liquid crystal lift motor 660 are controlled. Then, when the process of step S304 ends, the process proceeds to step S305.

(Step S305)
In step S305, the sub CPU 401 performs image control processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 transmits an effect designation command to the effect control board 600 based on the contents of the effect determined by the sub effect determining process described later, and the liquid crystal control CPU 601 of the effect control board 600 is the liquid crystal display device 46. Control. Then, when the process of step S305 ends, the process proceeds to step S306.

(Step S306)
In step S306, the sub CPU 401 performs various switch detection processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of executing a predetermined process when the effect button detection sensor 710sw detects an operation of the effect button 21 or when the cross key board 711 detects an operation of the cross key 22. . Then, when the process of step S306 ends, the process proceeds to step S302.

(Main board communication processing)
Next, based on FIG. 48, the main board | substrate communication process performed by the process of FIG.47 S302 is demonstrated. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a subroutine of main board communication processing.

(Step S302-1)
In step S302-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a different command is received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the command transmitted from the main control board 300 is a command different from the command transmitted last time. If it is determined that a different command has been received (step S302-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-2. If it is determined that a different command has not been received (step S302). −1 = No), the main board communication process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Step S302-2)
In step S302-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a game information storage process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for creating game information based on a command different from the previously transmitted command and storing it in a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3.

(Step S302-3)
In step S302-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a command analysis process that will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 401 executes a process based on the game information stored by the process of step S302-2. When the process of step S302-3 ends, the main board communication process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, based on FIG. 49, the command analysis process performed by the process of step S302-3 of FIG. 48 is demonstrated. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a subroutine of command analysis processing.

(Step S302-3-1)
In step S302-3-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a command-by-command process that will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the sub CPU 401 performs processing according to the command received from the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2.

(Step S302-3-2)
In step S302-3-2, the sub CPU 401 performs lamp data determination processing. Specifically, sub CPU401 performs the process which determines the lamp data corresponding to the production content determined by the process according to command of step S302-3-1. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-3.

(Step S302-3-3)
In step S302-3-3, the sub CPU 401 performs sound data determination processing. Specifically, sub CPU401 performs the process which determines the sound data corresponding to the production content determined by the process according to command of step S302-3-1. Then, when the process of step S302-3-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4.

(Step S302-3-4)
In step S302-3-4, the sub CPU 401 performs image data determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining image data corresponding to the effect content determined by the command-specific processing in step S302-3-1. When the process of step S302-3-4 ends, the command analysis process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Processing by command)
Next, the command-by-command processing performed by the processing in step S302-3-1 in FIG. 49 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a subroutine for processing by command.

(Step S302-3-1-1)
In step S302-3-1-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a conditional device command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is a conditional device command. If it is determined that the received command is a conditional device command (step S302-3-1-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2, and the received command is a condition command. If it is determined that the command is not an apparatus command (step S302-3-1-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-3-1-3.

(Step S302-3-1-2)
In step S302-3-1-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a conditional device command reception process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the sub CPU 401 performs processing according to the condition device command received from the main control board 300 and the state managed by the sub control board 400. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6.

(Step S302-3-3-1)
In step S302-3-3-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a display determination command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is a display determination command. If it is determined that the received command is a display determination command (step S302-3-3-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-4, and the received command is displayed. If it is determined that the command is not a determination command (step S302-3-3-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-5-1-5.

(Step S302-3-1-4)
In step S302-3-1-1-4, the sub CPU 401 performs a display determination command reception process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the sub CPU 401 performs processing according to the display determination command received from the main control board 300 and the state managed by the sub control board 400. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-1-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6.

(Step S302-3-5-1-5)
In step S302-3-1-1-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing according to the received command. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing according to the command received from the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-5-1-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6.

(Step S302-3-1-6)
In step S302-3-1-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a sub effect determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a condition device command reception process in step S302-3-1-2, a display determination command reception process in step S302-3-1-1, and a process according to the received command. Based on the execution result and the effect determination table (see FIG. 24), processing for determining the effect executed by the liquid crystal display device 46 or the like is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-6 ends, the command-specific process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-2 of the command analysis process.

(Processing when receiving conditional device command)
Next, based on FIG. 51, the conditional device command reception process performed by the process of step S302-3-1-2 of FIG. 50 will be described. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing when a conditional device command is received.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1)
In step S302-3-2-1-1, the sub CPU 401 performs state transition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing according to the state managed by the sub control board 400 based on the value of the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Here, in the state-by-state transition processing in step S302-3-2-1-1, a subroutine corresponding to the value of the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is provided (see FIGS. 52 to 71). Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the chance state winning flag is ON. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the chance state winning flag is ON based on the value of the chance state winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the chance state winning flag is ON (step S302-3-1-2-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-3, and the chance state If it is determined that the winning flag is not ON (step S302-3-1-2-2 = No), the subroutine for the conditional device command reception process is terminated, and step S302-3-1 for the command-specific process. The process is shifted to -6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” in the fake game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-3 is completed, the subroutine of the conditional device command reception process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1 of the command-specific process.

(Normal processing)
Next, based on FIG. 52, the normal state process performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the normal state in the state-specific transition process in step S302-3-2-1-1 of FIG. Will be described. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a subroutine for normal state processing.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-1)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-1-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-1-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-1-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the fake game number counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more. If it is determined that the value of the fake game number counter is “1” or more (step S302-3-1-2-1-1-2 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-2 is performed. When the process proceeds to 1-1-3 and it is determined that the value of the fake game number counter is not equal to or greater than “1” (step S302-3-1-2-1-1-2 = No), The process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-1-4.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-1-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-1-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the fake game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-4.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-1-4)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-4, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning number is “05”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is the winning number “05”. And when it determines with a winning number being "05" (step S302-3-2-1-1-4 = Yes), step S302-3-2-1-1-1-5. When it is determined that the winning number is not “05” (step S302-3-1-2-1-4 = No), step S302-3-1-2-1 is performed. The process is shifted to -1-7.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-1-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “50” to the value of the third Bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the third bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-1-5 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-1-6.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-1-6)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the third Bonus state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the third Bonus state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the third Bonus state. When the processing of step S302-3-2-1-1-1-6 is completed, the normal state processing subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception processing is advanced to step S302-3-1-2-2. Migrate processing.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-1-7)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ceiling game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-1-1. To determine whether or not the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the ceiling game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-2-12-1-7 = Yes), step S302-3-2-12-1 is performed. When the process is shifted to -1-8 and it is determined that the value of the ceiling game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-1-7 = No), step S302 is performed. The process proceeds to 3-1-2-1-1-10.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-1-8)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-1-8, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus standby distribution process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 waits for the first Bonus, the second Bonus, and the third Bonus based on the Bonus state distribution lottery table (normal state) (see FIG. 26A) provided in the sub ROM 402. Processing for determining one of the waiting is performed. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of storing in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 when it is determined that the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, or the third Bonus standby is determined. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-1-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-1-9.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-1-9)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-9, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the Bonus preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the Bonus preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the Bonus preparation state. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-1-9 ends, the normal state process subroutine ends, and the conditional device command reception process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2. Migrate processing.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-1-10)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-1-10, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus preparation state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 stores information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (normal state) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 25A). Based on this, the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-1-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-12-1-11.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-11)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-11, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state as a result of the lottery process by the Bonus preparation state shift lottery process in Step S302-3-2-1-1-1-10. Perform the process. And when it determines with having been elected (step S302-3-2-1-1-1-11 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-2-1-1-1-12, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-2-1-1-1-11 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-1-15.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-1-12)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-1-12, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus standby distribution process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 waits for the first Bonus, the second Bonus, and the third Bonus based on the Bonus state distribution lottery table (normal state) (see FIG. 26A) provided in the sub ROM 402. Processing for determining one of the waiting is performed. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of storing in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 when it is determined that the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, or the third Bonus standby is determined. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-1-1-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-1-1-13.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-1-1-13)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-1-13, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus precursor game number lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the bonus based on the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the Bonus precursor game number determination table (see FIG. 27A) provided in the sub ROM 402. The number of precursor games until the transition to the ready state is determined, and processing for setting the value of the Bonus precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-1-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-1-1-14.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-1-14)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-14, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the Bonus precursor state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the Bonus precursor state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the Bonus precursor state. Then, when the processing of step S302-3-2-1-1-1-14 is completed, the normal state processing subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception processing is advanced to step S302-3-1-2-2. Migrate processing.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-1-15)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-1-15, the sub CPU 401 performs a chance state lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 shifts to the chance state based on the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the chance state shift lottery table (see FIG. 28) provided in the sub ROM 402. A process of lottery is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-1-1-15 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-1-16.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-1-16)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-16, the sub CPU 401 performs a process for determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not it is determined to shift to the chance state as a result of the lottery process by the chance state transition lottery process in step S302-3-2-1-1-1-15. I do. And when it determines with having been elected (step S302-3-2-1-1-1-16 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-2-1-1-1-17, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-2-1-2-1-16 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-1-20.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-1-17)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-17, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the chance precursor state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the chance precursor state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the chance precursor state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-1-18.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-1-18)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-1-18, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning on the chance state winning flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning on the chance state winning flag in the chance state winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-1-18 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-1-19.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-1-19)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-19, the sub CPU 401 performs a chance precursor game number lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the chance based on the information relating to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the chance predictor game number determination table (see FIG. 27B) provided in the sub ROM 402. The number of precursor games until the transition to the state is determined, and the value of the chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is set. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-19 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-12-1-20.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-20)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-20, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the chance state winning flag is OFF. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the chance state winning flag is OFF based on the value of the chance state winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the chance state winning flag is OFF (step S302-3-2-1-1-1-20 = Yes), step S302-3-2-1-2-1-21. When it is determined that the chance state winning flag is not OFF (step S302-3-2-1-2-1-20 = No), the normal state processing subroutine is terminated, The processing shifts to step S302-3-1-2-2 of the processing at the time of receiving the conditional device command.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-1-21)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-1-21, the sub CPU 401 performs a fake game number lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 is based on the information relating to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the normal state fake game number determination table provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 29A). Then, processing for determining the number of fake games and setting the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-21 is completed, the subroutine for the normal state process is terminated, and the condition device command reception process is advanced to step S302-3-1-2-2. Migrate processing.

(Treatment for chance precursor state)
Next, based on FIG. 53, in the state transition processing in step S302-3-2-1-1 of FIG. 51, the chance precursor state performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the chance precursor state. The processing will be described. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a subroutine of chance sign state processing.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-1)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-2-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-2-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-1-2.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-1-1-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning number is “05”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is the winning number “05”. If it is determined that the winning number is “05” (step S302-3-2-1-2-2 = Yes), step S302-3-2-1-2-1-2 If it is determined that the winning number is not “05” (step S302-3-2-1-2-2 = No), step S302-3-1-2-1 is performed. The process is shifted to -2-5.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-2-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-1-1-2-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the third Bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the third bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-4.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-4)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-4, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the third Bonus state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the third Bonus state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the third Bonus state. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-4 ends, the chance sign state processing subroutine ends, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-5)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-2-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the chance sign state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the chance sign state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-6.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-6)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ceiling game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-2-1. To determine whether or not the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the ceiling game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-6 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-1 is performed. When the processing is shifted to -2-7 and it is determined that the value of the ceiling game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-6 = No), step S302 is performed. The process is transferred to 3-1-2-1-2-9.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-7)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-7-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus standby distribution process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 waits for the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, based on the Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance precursor state) (see FIG. 26B) provided in the sub ROM 402. A process for determining any of the three Bonus standbys is performed. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of storing in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 when it is determined that the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, or the third Bonus standby is determined. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-8.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-8-8)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-8, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the Bonus preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the Bonus preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the Bonus preparation state. When the processing of step S302-3-2-1-2-8 ends, the chance sign state processing subroutine ends and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the conditional device command reception processing ends. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-9)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-9, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus preparation state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 includes information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and a Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (chance precursor state) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 25B). Based on the above, the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-10.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-10)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-10, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state as a result of the lottery process by the Bonus preparation state transition lottery process in Step S302-3-2-1-2-9. Perform the process. And when it determines with having been elected (step S302-3-2-1-2-10 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-2-1-2-11, When it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-2-1-2-10 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-14.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-11)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-11, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus standby distribution process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 waits for the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, based on the Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance precursor state) (see FIG. 26B) provided in the sub ROM 402. A process for determining any of the three Bonus standbys is performed. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of storing in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 when it is determined that the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, or the third Bonus standby is determined. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-12.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-12)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-12, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus precursor game number lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the bonus based on the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the Bonus precursor game number determination table (see FIG. 27A) provided in the sub ROM 402. The number of precursor games until the transition to the ready state is determined, and processing for setting the value of the Bonus precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-13.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-13)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-13, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the Bonus precursor state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the Bonus precursor state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the Bonus precursor state. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-13 ends, the chance sign state processing subroutine ends, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-14)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-14, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the chance sign state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 obtains a result of subtracting “1” from the value of the chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-5. Then, a process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the chance sign state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 has become “0”. If it is determined that the value of the chance sign state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-14 = Yes), step S302-3-1-1 When the process proceeds to 2-1-2-15 and it is determined that the value of the chance sign state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-14) = No), the subroutine for the chance precursor state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 in the process at the time of receiving the conditional device command.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-15)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-15, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the chance state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the chance state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the chance state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-16.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-16)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-16, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the chance state winning flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the chance state winning flag in the chance state winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-16 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-17.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-17)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-17, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “10” to the value of the chance state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “10” to the value of the chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the processing of step S302-3-2-1-2-17 ends, the chance sign state processing subroutine ends, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the conditional device command reception processing ends. The process is transferred to.

(Process for Bonus precursor state)
Next, based on FIG. 54, in the state-specific transition processing in step S302-3-2-1 in FIG. 51, the Bonus precursor state performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the Bonus precursor state. The processing will be described. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the Bonus precursor state process.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-3-1)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-3-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-3-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-3-2.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-3-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-3-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the fake game number counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more. When it is determined that the value of the fake game number counter is “1” or more (step S302-3-1-2-1-3-2 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-2 is performed. When the processing is shifted to 1-3-3 and it is determined that the value of the fake game number counter is not “1” or more (step S302-3-2-1-1-2-2 = No), The process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-3-4.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-3-3)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-3-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” in the fake game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-3-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-3-4.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-3-4)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-3-4, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning number is “05”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is the winning number “05”. If it is determined that the winning number is “05” (step S302-3-2-1-2-3 = Yes), step S302-3-2-1-2-3-5 is performed. If it is determined that the winning number is not “05” (step S302-3-1-2-1-3-4 = No), step S302-3-2-1-1 is performed. Shifts the process to -3--7.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-3-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-3-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “50” to the value of the third Bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the third bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-3-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-3-6.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-3-6)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-3-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the third Bonus state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the third Bonus state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the third Bonus state. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-3-6 ends, the Bonus precursor state process subroutine ends, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-3-7)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-3-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ceiling game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-3-1. To determine whether or not the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in is “0”. When it is determined that the value of the ceiling game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-3-7 = Yes), step S302-3-2-12-1 is performed. When the process proceeds to -3-8 and it is determined that the value of the ceiling game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-3-7 = No), step S302 is performed. The process moves to 3-1-2-1-3-9.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-3-8)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-3-8, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the Bonus preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the Bonus preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the Bonus preparation state. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-3-8 ends, the Bonus precursor state process subroutine ends, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-3-9)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-3-9, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the first Bonus standby or the second Bonus standby is performed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the first Bonus standby or the second Bonus standby is performed based on the value of the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. When it is determined that the first Bonus is waiting or the second Bonus is waiting (Step S302-3-2-1-2-9-9 = Yes), Step S302-3-2-1-1 is performed. When the process proceeds to -3-10 and it is determined that the first Bonus is not waiting or the second Bonus is not waiting (Step S302-3-2-1-2-3-9 = No), Step S302 is performed. The process shifts to 3-1-2-1-3-11.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-3-10)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-3-10, the sub CPU 401 performs a promotion lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the promotion lottery table (waiting for the first Bonus) provided in the sub ROM 402 based on the value of the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 (see FIG. 30A). ) Or the promotion lottery table (waiting for the second Bonus) (see FIG. 30B), the selected promotion lottery table and the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command On the basis of the first Bonus standby, the lottery for determining whether the second Bonus standby or the third Bonus standby is performed, and in the second Bonus standby, the lottery for determining whether the third Bonus is standby is performed. The lottery result is stored in a Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-3-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-3-11.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-3-11)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-3-11, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the Bonus precursor state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the Bonus precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-3-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-3-12.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-3-12)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-3-12, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the value of the Bonus precursor state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the Bonus precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the Bonus precursor state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-3-12 = Yes), step S302-3-1-1 When the process proceeds to 2-1-3-13 and it is determined that the value of the Bonus precursor state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-1-3-12). = No), the Bonus precursor state process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 of the conditional device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-3-13)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-3-13, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the Bonus preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the Bonus preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the Bonus preparation state. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-13-13 is completed, the Bonus precursor state process subroutine is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the conditional device command reception process is terminated. The process is transferred to.

(Chance state processing)
Next, based on FIG. 55, a chance state process performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the chance state in the state-by-state transition process in step S302-3-2-1 in FIG. Will be described. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a subroutine of chance state processing.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-4-1)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-4-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-4-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-4-2.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-4-2)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-4-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the winning number is “05”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is the winning number “05”. And when it determines with a winning number being "05" (step S302-3-2-1-1-4-2 = Yes), step S302-3-2-1-1-4-3. If it is determined that the winning number is not “05” (step S302-3-1-2-1-4-2 = No), step S302-3-1-2-1 is performed. The process is shifted to -4-6.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-4)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-4-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “50” to the value of the third Bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the third bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-4-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-4-4.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-4-4)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-4-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the third Bonus state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the third Bonus state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the third Bonus state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-4-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-4-5.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-4-5)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-4-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the chance state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the processing of step S302-3-2-1-2-4-5 is completed, the chance state processing subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception processing is advanced to step S302-3-1-2-2. Migrate processing.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-4-6)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-4-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ceiling game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-2-1-4-1. To determine whether or not the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in is “0”. When it is determined that the value of the ceiling game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-4-6 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-1. When the process proceeds to -4--7 and it is determined that the value of the ceiling game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-4-6 = No), step S302 is performed. The process shifts to 3-1-2-1-4-9.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-4-7)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-4-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus standby distribution process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 waits for the first Bonus, the second Bonus, and the third Bonus based on the Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance state) (see FIG. 26C) provided in the sub ROM 402. Processing for determining one of the waiting is performed. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of storing in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 when it is determined that the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, or the third Bonus standby is determined. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-4-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-4-8.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-4-8)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-4-8, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the Bonus preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the Bonus preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the Bonus preparation state. When the processing of step S302-3-2-1-2-4-8 is completed, the chance state processing subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception processing is advanced to step S302-3-1-2-2. Migrate processing.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-4-9)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-4-9, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the chance state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-4-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-4-10.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-4-10)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-4-10, the sub CPU 401 performs a chance state bonus preparation state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 stores information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and a Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (chance state) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 25C). Based on this, the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-4-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-4-11.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-4-11)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-4-11, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, whether or not the sub CPU 401 has determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state as a result of the lottery by the chance state Bonus preparation state transition lottery process in Step S302-3-2-1-2-4-10. The process which determines is performed. And when it determines with having been elected (step S302-3-2-1-2-4-11 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-2-1-2-4-12, When it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-2-1-2-4-11 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-4-14.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-4-12)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-4-12, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus standby distribution process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 waits for the first Bonus, the second Bonus, and the third Bonus based on the Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance state) (see FIG. 26C) provided in the sub ROM 402. Processing for determining one of the waiting is performed. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of storing in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 when it is determined that the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, or the third Bonus standby is determined. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-4-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-4-13.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-4-13)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-4-13, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the Bonus preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the Bonus preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the Bonus preparation state. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-4-13 ends, the chance state processing subroutine ends, and the conditional device command reception process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2. Migrate processing.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-4-14)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-4-14, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the chance state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-4-9. Processing for determining whether or not the value of the chance state game number counter provided in the sub-RAM 403 has become “0” is performed. When it is determined that the value of the chance state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-4-14 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2 is performed. When the process is shifted to -1-4-15 and it is determined that the value of the chance state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-4-14 = No) ), The chance state process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 of the conditional device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-4-15)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-4-15, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the normal state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the normal state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the normal state. When the processing of step S302-3-2-1-2-4-15 ends, the chance status processing subroutine ends, and the conditional device command reception processing proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2. Migrate processing.

(Bonus ready state processing)
Next, based on FIG. 56, in the state-specific migration processing in step S302-3-2-1-1 of FIG. The processing will be described. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the Bonus preparation state process.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-5-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the winning number is “05”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is the winning number “05”. If it is determined that the winning number is “05” (step S302-3-2-1-5-1 = Yes), step S302-3-2-1-2-5-1 is performed. When it is determined that the winning number is not “05” (step S302-3-2-1-1-5-1 = No), step S302-3-2-12-1 is performed. The process is shifted to -5-4.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-5-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “50” to the value of the third Bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the third bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-5-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-5-3.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-5-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-5-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the third Bonus state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the third Bonus state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the third Bonus state. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-5-3 ends, the subroutine for the Bonus preparation state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the condition device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-5-4)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-5-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the first Bonus standby or the second Bonus standby is performed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the first Bonus standby or the second Bonus standby is performed based on the value of the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the first Bonus is waiting or the second Bonus is waiting (step S302-3-2-1-2-5-4 = Yes), step S302-3-2-1-1 is performed. When the process proceeds to -5-5 and it is determined that the first Bonus is not waiting or the second Bonus is not waiting (step S302-3-2-1-2-5-4 = No), the Bonus preparation is performed. The state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 in the conditional device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-5-5)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-5-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a promotion lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the promotion lottery table (waiting for the first Bonus) provided in the sub ROM 402 based on the value of the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 (see FIG. 30A). ) Or the promotion lottery table (waiting for the second Bonus) (see FIG. 30B), the selected promotion lottery table and the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command On the basis of the first Bonus standby, the lottery for determining whether the second Bonus standby or the third Bonus standby is performed, and in the second Bonus standby, the lottery for determining whether the third Bonus is standby is performed. The lottery result is stored in a Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-5-5 ends, the subroutine for the Bonus preparation state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Process for the first Bonus state)
Next, based on FIG. 57, the first Bonus state performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the first Bonus state in the state-by-state transition process of Step S302-3-2-1 in FIG. The processing will be described. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the first Bonus state process.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-6-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the first bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the first bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-6-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-6-2.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-6-2)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-6-2, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART preparation state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines that the winning combination included in the conditional device command is on condition that the value of the ART winning flag stored in the ART winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is OFF. Based on this information and the first Bonus state ART ready state transition lottery table (see FIG. 31A) provided in the sub-ROM 402, a process of lottering whether to shift to the ART ready state is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-6-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-6-3.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-6-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-6-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not it is determined to shift to the ART preparation state as a result of the lottery processing by the ART preparation state transition lottery process in step S302-3-2-1-2-6-2. Perform the process. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-2-1-2-6-3 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-2-1-2-6-4, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-2-1-2-6-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-6-5.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-6-4)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-6-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning on the ART winning flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning on the ART winning flag in the ART winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-6-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-6-5.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-6-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-6-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the first bonus state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the first Bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-2-1-6-1. Then, a process of determining whether or not the value of the first bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0” is performed. If it is determined that the value of the first Bonus state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-6-5 = Yes), step S302-3-1-1— When the process proceeds to 2-1-6-6 and it is determined that the value of the first Bonus state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-1-6-5). = No), the first bonus state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 of the conditional device command reception processing.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-6-6)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-6-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the ART winning flag is ON. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the ART winning flag is ON based on a value stored in an ART winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the ART winning flag is ON (step S302-3-2-1-2-6-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-6-7. If the processing is shifted and it is determined that the ART winning flag is not ON (step S302-3-2-1-2-6-6 = No), step S302-3-2-12-1-6 The process is shifted to -9.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-6-7)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-6-7, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the ART preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the ART preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the ART preparation state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-6-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-6-8.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-6-8)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-6-8, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the ART winning flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the ART winning flag in the ART winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-6-8 ends, the subroutine for the first bonus state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the condition device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-6-9)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-6-9, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the first fall standby state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the first fall standby state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the first fall standby state. Do. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-6-9 ends, the subroutine for the first Bonus state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the condition device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Second Bonus state processing)
Next, based on FIG. 58, the second Bonus state performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the second Bonus state in the state-specific transition process of Step S302-3-2-1 in FIG. The processing will be described. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the second Bonus state process.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-7-1)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-7-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the second bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the second bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-7-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-7-2.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-7-2)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-7-2, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART preparation state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines that the winning combination included in the conditional device command is on condition that the value of the ART winning flag stored in the ART winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is OFF. Based on the above information and the second Bonus state ART ready state transition lottery table (see FIG. 31B) provided in the sub ROM 402, a process of lottering whether to shift to the ART ready state is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-7-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-7-3.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-7-3)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-7-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not it is determined to shift to the ART preparation state as a result of the lottery processing by the ART preparation state transition lottery process in step S302-3-2-1-2-7-2. Perform the process. And when it determines with having been elected (step S302-3-2-1-2-7-3 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-2-1-2-7-4, When it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-2-1-2-7-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-7-5.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-7-4)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-7-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning on the ART winning flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning on the ART winning flag in the ART winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-7-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-7-5.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-7-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-7-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second Bonus state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the second Bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-7-1. Then, a process of determining whether or not the value of the second bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 has become “0” is performed. If it is determined that the value of the second Bonus state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-7-5 = Yes), step S302-3-1-1— When the process proceeds to 2-1-7-6 and it is determined that the value of the second bonus state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-7-5). = No), the subroutine for the second Bonus state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 in the condition device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-7-6)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-7-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the ART winning flag is ON. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the ART winning flag is ON based on a value stored in an ART winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the ART winning flag is ON (step S302-3-2-1-1-7-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-7-7. If the process is shifted and it is determined that the ART winning flag is not ON (step S302-3-2-1-2-7-6 = No), step S302-3-2-12-1-7 The process is shifted to -9.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-7-7)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-7-7, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the ART preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the ART preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the ART preparation state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-7-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-7-8.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-7-8)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-7-8, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the ART winning flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the ART winning flag in the ART winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-7-8 ends, the subroutine for the second Bonus state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the condition device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-7-9)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-7-9, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the first fall standby state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the first fall standby state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the first fall standby state. Do. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-7-9 ends, the subroutine for the second Bonus state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the condition device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Process for 3rd Bonus state)
Next, based on FIG. 59, the third Bonus state performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the third Bonus state in the state-specific transition process of Step S302-3-2-1 in FIG. The processing will be described. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the third Bonus state process.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-8-1)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-8-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the third Bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the third bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-8-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-8-2.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-8-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-8-2, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART state game number addition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 adds the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the number of games for the ART state provided in the sub ROM 402 (the third Bonus state) (FIG. 32A). On the basis of (see)), the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-8-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-8-3.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-8-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-8-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. More specifically, the sub CPU 401 may increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery by the ART state game number addition lottery process in step S302-3-2-1-2-8-2. A process of determining whether or not it has been determined is performed. And when it determines with having been elected (step S302-3-2-1-2-8-3 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-2-1-2-8-4, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-2-1-2-8-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-8-5.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-8-4)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-8-4, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 indicates the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery processing by the lottery process for adding the number of games for the ART state in step S302-3-2-1-2-8-2. Is added to the ART state game number counter provided in. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-8-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-8-5.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-8-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-8-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the third Bonus state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the third Bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-8-1. Then, a process of determining whether or not the value of the third Bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0” is performed. If it is determined that the value of the third Bonus state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-8-5 = Yes), step S302-3-1-1— When the process proceeds to 2-1-8-6 and it is determined that the value of the third Bonus state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-8-5). = No), the third Bonus state process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 in the conditional device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-8-6)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-8-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the ART preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the ART preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the ART preparation state. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-8-6 ends, the third Bonus state processing subroutine ends, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Processing for the first fall standby state)
Next, based on FIG. 60, in the state-by-state transition processing in step S302-3-2-1-1 of FIG. The process for the one fall standby state will be described. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the first fall standby state processing.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-9-1)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-9-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a first falling standby state pull-out lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 stores information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and a pull-down lottery table for the first fall standby state provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 33A). Based on this, after the Bonus state is completed, a process of lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the ART preparation state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-9-1 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-9-2.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-9-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-9-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 has been determined to shift to the ART preparation state as a result of the lottery by the first falling standby state pull-out lottery process in step S302-3-2-1-1-9-1. Processing to determine whether or not. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-2-1-1-9-2 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-2-1-1-9-3, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-2-1-1-9-2 = No), the first fall standby state processing subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception processing step is completed. The process proceeds to S302-3-1-2-2.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-9-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-3-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for changing the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the ART preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the ART preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the ART preparation state. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-9-3 is completed, the subroutine for the first fall standby state process is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process is terminated. The process is shifted to -2.

(ART preparation status processing)
Next, based on FIG. 61, in the state-by-state transition processing in step S302-3-2-1 in FIG. 51, the ART preparation state performed when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the ART preparation state The processing will be described. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the ART preparation state processing.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-10-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-10-1, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART state game number addition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 adds information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the number of ART state games provided in the sub ROM 402, and the lottery table (ART preparation state / ART state) (FIG. 32). Based on (B), a process of drawing whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-10-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-10-2.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-10-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-10-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery by the ART state game number addition lottery process in step S302-3-2-1-1-10-1. A process of determining whether or not it has been determined is performed. And when it determines with having been elected (step S302-3-2-1-1-10-2 = Yes), a process is transferred to step S302-3-2-1-2-10-3, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-2-1-2-10-2 = No), the ART preparation state processing subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception processing step S302 is completed. The process is transferred to 3-1-2-2.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-10-3)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-10-3, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART state game number counter addition process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 displays the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery process by the lottery process for adding the number of ART state games in step S302-3-2-1-1-10-1, in the sub RAM 403. Is added to the ART state game number counter provided in. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-10-3 ends, the ART preparation state process subroutine ends, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

(ART status processing)
Next, based on FIG. 62, in the state-specific transition processing in step S302-3-2-1 in FIG. 51, the ART state processing performed when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the ART state. Will be described. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a subroutine of ART state processing.

(Step S302-3-2-11-11-1)
In step S302-3-2-11-11-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-11-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-12-11-2.

(Step S302-3-2-1-11-11-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-11-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ART state fake game number counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ART state fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more. If it is determined that the value of the fake game number counter for the ART state is “1” or more (step S302-3-2-12-11-2 = Yes), step S302-3-1 is performed. When the process proceeds to 2-1-11-3 and it is determined that the value of the ART state fake game number counter is not equal to or greater than “1” (step S302-3-2-12-1-11). -2 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-4.

(Step S302-3-2-1-11-11-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-11-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART state fake game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART state fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-11-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-4.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-11-4)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-11-4, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART state game number addition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 adds information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the number of ART state games provided in the sub ROM 402, and the lottery table (ART preparation state / ART state) (FIG. 32). Based on (B), a process of drawing whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state is performed. When the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-11-4 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-5.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-11-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-11-11-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery by the ART state game number addition lottery process in step S302-3-2-1-11-11-4. A process of determining whether or not it has been determined is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-2-1-1-11-5 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-6, When it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-2-1-11-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-7.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-6)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-11-6, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 displays the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery processing by the ART state game number addition lottery process in step S302-3-2-1-11-11-4, as the sub RAM 403. Is added to the ART state game number counter provided in. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-11-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-7.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-11-7)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-11-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a first extra state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401, based on the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the first added state transition lottery table (see FIG. 34A) provided in the sub ROM 402, A process of drawing whether or not to shift to the first addition state is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-11-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-8.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-11-8)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-11-8, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, whether or not the sub CPU 401 has determined to shift to the first added state as a result of the lottery by the first added state shifting lottery process in step S302-3-2-1-1-11-7. The process which determines is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-2-1-1-11-8 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-9, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-2-1-1-11-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-11.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-9)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-11-9, the sub CPU 401 performs a first extra sign game number lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 is based on information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and a first extra sign game number determination table (see FIG. 27C) provided in the sub ROM 402. Then, the number of precursor games until the transition to the first extra preparation state is determined, and the value of the first extra precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is set. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-11-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-10.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-10)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-11-10, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for changing the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the first added sign state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the first surrender sign state in the status storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the first surrender sign state. Do. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-11-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-15.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-11-11)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-11-11, the sub CPU 401 performs a second added state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401, based on the information relating to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the second added state transition lottery table (see FIG. 34B) provided in the sub ROM 402, The lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the second added state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-11-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-12.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-12)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-11-12, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not it is determined to shift to the second added state as a result of the lottery by the second added state shifting lottery process in step S302-3-2-1-1-11-11. The process which determines is performed. And when it determines with having been elected (step S302-3-2-1-1-11-12 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-13, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-2-1-11-11 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-16.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-13)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-11-13, the sub CPU 401 performs a second extra sign game number lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 is based on the information relating to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the second added sign game number determination table (see FIG. 27D) provided in the sub ROM 402. Then, the number of precursor games until the transition to the second supplementary preparation state is determined, and the value of the second supplementary precursor game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is set. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-11-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-14.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-14)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-11-14, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for changing the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the second added sign state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the second surplus sign state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the second surplus sign state. Do. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-11-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-15.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-15)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-11-15, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the ART state fake game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the ART state fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the processing of step S302-3-2-1-1-11-15 is completed, the ART state processing subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception processing is advanced to step S302-3-1-2-2. Migrate processing.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-16)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-11-16, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ART state game number counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-2-11-11-1. Processing for determining whether or not the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub-RAM 403 is “1” or more is performed. If it is determined that the value of the ART state game number counter is “1” or more (step S302-3-2-1-1-11-16 = Yes), step S302-3-1-1 When the process proceeds to 2-1-11-17 and it is determined that the value of the ART state game number counter is not equal to or greater than “1” (step S302-3-2-1-1-11-16). = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-19.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-17)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-11-17, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the value of the ART state fake game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ART state fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the fake game number counter for the ART state is “0” (step S302-3-2-1-1-11-17 = Yes), step S302-3-1-1 When the process proceeds to 2-1-11-18 and it is determined that the value of the ART state fake game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-1-11-17) = No), the ART state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 of the conditional device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-11-18)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-11-18, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state fake game number lottery processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 is based on the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the ART state fake game number determination table (see FIG. 29B) provided in the sub ROM 402. Then, the number of ART state fake games is determined, and the value of the ART state fake game number counter provided in the sub-RAM 403 is set. Then, when the processing of step S302-3-2-1-1-11-18 is completed, the ART state processing subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception processing is advanced to step S302-3-1-2-2. Migrate processing.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-19)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-11-19, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the fourth fall standby state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the fourth fall standby state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the fourth fall standby state. Do. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-11-19 ends, the ART state subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2. Migrate processing.

(First extra sign state processing)
Next, based on FIG. 63, in the state-by-state transition process in step S302-3-2-1-1 of FIG. A description will be given of the process for adding one sign state. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the first sign-on sign state process.

(Step S302-3-2-12-12-1)
In step S302-3-2-12-12-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-12-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-12-1-12-2.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-12-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-2-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the first extra sign state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the first extra sign state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-12-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-12-3.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-12-3)
In step S302-3-2-12-1-12-3, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART state game number addition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 adds information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the ART state game number addition lottery table (addition sign state) provided in the sub ROM 402 (FIG. 32C). On the basis of (see)), the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-12-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-12-1-12-4.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-12-4)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-4-4, the sub CPU 401 performs a process for determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery by the lottery process by adding the number of ART state games in step S302-3-2-1-2-12-3. A process of determining whether or not it has been determined is performed. And when it determines with having been elected (step S302-3-2-12-1-12-4 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-2-1-12-12-5, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-2-12-1-12-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-12-1-12-6.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-12-5)
In step S302-3-2-12-1-12-5, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART state game number counter addition process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 indicates the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery processing by the ART state game number addition lottery process in step S302-3-2-1-2-12-3, as the sub RAM 403. Is added to the ART state game number counter provided in. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-12-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-12-1-12-6.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-12-6)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-12-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the first extra sign state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the first extra sign state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-2-12-12-2. As a result, a process of determining whether or not the value of the first extra sign state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 has become “0” is performed. When it is determined that the value of the first extra sign state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-12-6 = Yes), step S302-3- When the process proceeds to 1-2-1-12-7 and it is determined that the value of the first extra sign state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-1). -12-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-12-1-12-8.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-12-7)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-12-7, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the first addition preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the first addition preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the first addition preparation state. Do. When the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-12-7 is completed, the subroutine for the first sign of a precursor sign state is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process is terminated. The process is shifted to -2.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-12-8)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-12-8, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ART state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-2-12-12-1. Processing for determining whether or not the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub-RAM 403 has become “0” is performed. When it is determined that the value of the ART state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-2-1-12-12 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2 is performed. The process proceeds to -1-12-9, and when it is determined that the value of the ART state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-12-8 = No). ), The first added sign state process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 in the condition device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-12-9)
In step S302-3-2-12-1-12-9, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter guarantee processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 prevents the ART state from ending because the value of the ART state game number counter becomes “0” even though it is determined to shift to the first additional state. Therefore, a process of copying the value of the first extra sign state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 to the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed. When the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-12-9 is completed, the subroutine for the first sign of precursor sign state is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process is terminated. The process is shifted to -2.

(First add-on preparation state process)
Next, based on FIG. 64, in the state-by-state transition process in step S302-3-2-1-1 of FIG. 51, the first process performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the first addition preparation state. A description will be given of the process for the 1st addition preparation state. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the first add-on preparation state process.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-13-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-13-1, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART state game number addition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 adds information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the ART state game number addition lottery table (addition preparation state) provided in the sub ROM 402 (FIG. 32D). On the basis of (see)), the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-13-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-12-1-13-2.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-13-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-13-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery by the ART state game number addition lottery process in step S302-3-2-1-1-13-1. A process of determining whether or not it has been determined is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-2-1-1-13-2 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-2-12-1-13-3, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-2-1-1-13-2 = No), the first add-on preparation state processing subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception processing is completed. The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-13-3)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-13-3, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART state game number counter addition process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 displays the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery process by the ART state game number addition lottery process in step S302-3-2-1-2-13-1, in the sub RAM 403. Is added to the ART state game number counter provided in. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-13-3 is completed, the first add-on preparation state process subroutine is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process is completed. The process is shifted to -2.

(Process for the first added state)
Next, based on FIG. 65, the first process performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the first added state in the state-specific transition processing in step S302-3-2-1-1 of FIG. The added state processing will be described. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the first added state processing.

(Step S302-3-2-12-14-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-14-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the first added state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the first added state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-14-1 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-12-1-14-2.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-14-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-1-2, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART state game number addition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 adds information relating to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the ART state game number addition lottery table (first addition state) provided in the sub ROM 402 (FIG. 32 (E ))), A process of drawing whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-14-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-14-3.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-14-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-14-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery by the ART state game number addition lottery process in step S302-3-2-12-14-2. A process of determining whether or not it has been determined is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-2-1-14-14 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-2-12-1-14-4, When it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-2-1-2-14-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-14-5.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-14-4)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-14-4, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 displays the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery process by the ART state game number addition lottery process in step S302-3-2-12-14-2. Is added to the ART state game number counter provided in. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-14-4 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-14-5.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-14-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-14-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the first added state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the first added state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the processing of step S302-3-2-12-14-1. As a result, a process of determining whether or not the value of the first added state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0” is performed. When it is determined that the value of the first added state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-14-5 = Yes), step S302-3-1 is performed. When the process shifts to 2-1-14-6 and it is determined that the value of the first added game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-14). −5 = No), the first added state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 of the conditional device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-14-6)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-14-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the second fall standby state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the second fall standby state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the second fall standby state. Do. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-14-6 ends, the first added state processing subroutine ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the condition device command reception process ends. The processing is shifted to 2.

(Processing for second fall standby state)
Next, based on FIG. 66, in the state-by-state transition process in step S302-3-2-1-1 of FIG. 51, the second process is performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the second fall standby state. The process for the 2-fall standby state will be described. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the second fall standby state processing.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-15-1)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-15-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a lottery process by adding the number of ART state games. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 adds information relating to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the number of ART state games provided in the sub ROM 402, and the lottery table (second fall standby state) (FIG. 32 ( Based on G), a process of drawing whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-15-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-12-1-15-2.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-15-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-15-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery by the ART state game number addition lottery process in step S302-3-2-1-1-15-1. A process of determining whether or not it has been determined is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-2-1-15-15 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-2-12-1-15-3, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-2-1-1-15-2 = No), the second fall standby state processing subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception processing is terminated. The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-15-3)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-15-3, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 indicates the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery process by the lottery process for adding the number of games for the ART state in step S302-3-2-1-15-1 to the sub RAM 403. Is added to the ART state game number counter provided in. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-15-3 is completed, the second fall standby state process subroutine is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process is terminated. The process is shifted to -2.

(Second extra sign state processing)
Next, based on FIG. 67, in the state-by-state transition processing in step S302-3-2-1-1 of FIG. 51, the processing is performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the second added sign state. 2 The process for the sign of a sign is added. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the second added sign state processing.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-16-1)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-16-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-16-1 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-12-1-16-2.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-16-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the second extra sign state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the second extra sign state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-16-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-16-3.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-16-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-16-3, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART state game number addition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 adds information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the ART state game number addition lottery table (addition sign state) provided in the sub ROM 402 (FIG. 32C). On the basis of (see)), the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-16-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-16-4.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-16-4)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-4-4, the sub CPU 401 performs a process for determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery by the ART state game number addition lottery process in step S302-3-2-1-16-16-3. A process of determining whether or not it has been determined is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-2-1-16-16 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-2-1-1-16-5, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-2-1-16-16 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-16-16-6.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-16-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-16-5, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 indicates the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery process by the lottery process for adding the number of games for the ART state in step S302-3-2-1-16-16-3. Is added to the ART state game number counter provided in. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-16-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-16-6.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-16-6)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-6-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second extra sign state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the second extra sign state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-2-1-16-2. As a result, a process of determining whether or not the value of the second extra sign state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 has become “0” is performed. If it is determined that the value of the second extra sign state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-16-6 = Yes), step S302-3- When the process proceeds to 1-2-1-16-7 and it is determined that the value of the second extra sign state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-1). -16-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-12-1-16-8.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-16-7)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-16-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the second addition preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the second addition preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the second addition preparation state. Do. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-16-7 ends, the subroutine for the second surrender sign state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is shifted to -2.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-16-8)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-16-8, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the ART state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-16-1. Processing for determining whether or not the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub-RAM 403 has become “0” is performed. If it is determined that the value of the ART state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-2-1-16-16 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2 is performed. When the process proceeds to -1-16-9 and it is determined that the value of the ART state game number counter is not "0" (step S302-3-2-1-16-16-8 = No) ), The second added sign state process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 of the conditional device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-16-9)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-16-9, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter guarantee processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 prevents the ART state from ending because the value of the ART state game number counter becomes “0” even though it is determined to shift to the second additional state. For this purpose, processing is performed to copy the value of the second extra sign state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 to the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-16-9 ends, the subroutine for the second surrender sign state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is shifted to -2.

(Second add-on preparation state process)
Next, based on FIG. 68, in the state-by-state transition processing in step S302-3-2-1-1 of FIG. 51, the second control is performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the second addition preparation state. The process for the 2 extra preparation state will be described. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing for the second addition preparation state.

(Step S302-3-2-12-17-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-17-1, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART state game number addition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 adds information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the ART state game number addition lottery table (addition preparation state) provided in the sub ROM 402 (FIG. 32D). On the basis of (see)), the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-17-1 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-12-1-17-2.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-17-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-17-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery by the ART state game number addition lottery process in step S302-3-2-1-1-17-1. A process of determining whether or not it has been determined is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-2-1-1-17-2 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-2-1-1-17-3, If it is determined that the winning combination has not been won (step S302-3-2-1-1-17-2 = No), the second add-on preparation state processing subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception processing is completed. The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-17-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-3-3, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 indicates the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery process by the lottery process for adding the number of games for the ART state in step S302-3-2-1-1-17-1. Is added to the ART state game number counter provided in. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-17-3 ends, the subroutine for the second add-on preparation state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the condition device command reception process ends. The process is shifted to -2.

(Process for the second added state)
Next, based on FIG. 69, the second process performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the second added state in the state-specific transition process of step S302-3-2-1-1 of FIG. The added state processing will be described. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the second added state processing.

(Step S302-3-2-12-18-1)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-18-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the second added state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the second added state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-18-1 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-18-2.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-18-2)
In step S302-3-2-12-1-18-2, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART state game number addition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 adds information relating to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the ART state game number addition lottery table (second addition state) provided in the sub ROM 402 (FIG. 32 (F ))), A process of drawing whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-18-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-18-3.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-18-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-18-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery by the ART state game number addition lottery process in step S302-3-2-12-1-18-2. A process of determining whether or not it has been determined is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-2-1-1-18-3 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-2-1-1-18-4, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-2-1-18-18 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-18-5.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-18-4)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-18-4, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 displays the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery process by the lottery process for adding the number of games for the ART state in step S302-3-2-1-2-18-2. Is added to the ART state game number counter provided in. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-18-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-18-5.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-18-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-18-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second added state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the second added state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-18-1. As a result, a process of determining whether or not the value of the second added state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 has become “0” is performed. If it is determined that the value of the second added state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-2-1-1-18-5 = Yes), step S302-3-1 is performed. When the process proceeds to 2-1-18-6 and it is determined that the value of the second added state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-2-12-1-18). -5 = No), the second added state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 in the conditional device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-18-6)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-18-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the third fall standby state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the third fall standby state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the third fall standby state. Do. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-18-18-6 ends, the subroutine for the second added state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The processing is shifted to 2.

(Processing for the third fall standby state)
Next, based on FIG. 70, in the state-by-state transition process in step S302-3-2-1-1 of FIG. 51, the process is performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the third fall standby state. The process for the 3-fall standby state will be described. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a subroutine of third fall standby state processing.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-19-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-19-1, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART state game number addition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 adds information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the number of ART state games provided in the sub ROM 402, and the lottery table (third fall standby state) (FIG. 32 ( Based on H), a process of drawing whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-19-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-12-1-19-2.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-19-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-19-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process for determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery by the ART state game number addition lottery process in step S302-3-2-1-1-19-1. A process of determining whether or not it has been determined is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-2-1-19-19 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-2-1-1-19-3, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-2-1-19-19 = No), the third fall standby state processing subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception processing is terminated. The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-19-3)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-19-3, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 indicates the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery process by the lottery process for adding the number of games for the ART state in step S302-3-2-1-1-19-1 to the sub RAM 403. Is added to the ART state game number counter provided in. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-19-3 ends, the third fall standby state process subroutine ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is shifted to -2.

(Fourth fall waiting state process)
Next, based on FIG. 71, in the state-by-state transition process in step S302-3-2-1-1 of FIG. 51, the process is performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the fourth fall standby state. The 4-fall standby state process will be described. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a subroutine of fourth fall standby state processing.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-20-1)
In step S302-3-2-12-1-20-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a fourth falling standby state pull-out lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 stores information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the fourth roll-down standby state pull-out lottery table (see FIG. 33B) provided in the sub ROM 402. Based on this, after the ART state is completed, a process of lottery is performed as to whether or not to shift to the ART state again. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-20-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-20-2.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-20-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-20-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, whether or not the sub CPU 401 has decided to shift to the ART state as a result of the lottery by the fourth fall waiting state pull-out lottery process in step S302-3-2-12-1-20-1 is determined. The process which determines is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-2-1-20-20 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-2-1-20-20, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-2-1-2-20-2 = No), the fourth fall standby state processing subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception processing step is completed. The process proceeds to S302-3-1-2-2.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-20-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-20-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for changing the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the ART state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the ART state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the ART state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-20-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-20-4.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-20-4)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-4-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “50” to the value of the ART state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-20-4 ends, the fourth fall standby state process subroutine ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is shifted to -2.

(Process when receiving display judgment command)
Next, based on FIG. 72, the process at the time of display determination command reception performed by the process of step S302-3-1-4 of FIG. 50 will be described. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a subroutine of display determination command reception processing.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1, the sub CPU 401 performs state-specific transition processing for receiving a display determination command. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing according to the state managed by the sub control board 400 based on the value of the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Here, in the state-by-state transition processing in step S302-3-1-4-1, a subroutine corresponding to the value of the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is provided (see FIGS. 73 to 80). Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-1-1 is completed, the subroutine of the display determination command reception process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1 of the command-specific process.

(Process for Bonus preparation status when receiving display judgment command)
Next, based on FIG. 73, when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the Bonus ready state in the display command reception state transition process in step S302-3-4-1 of FIG. The processing for the Bonus preparation state at the time of display determination command reception to be performed will be described. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a subroutine for processing for preparing for a bonus when receiving a display determination command.

(Step S302-3-4-1-1-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-1-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not a Bonus replay is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not a symbol combination related to “Bonus Replay” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that the Bonus replay has been displayed (step S302-3-4-1-1-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-1-1-2. When it is determined that the Bonus replay is not displayed (Step S302-3-4-1-1-1 = No), the subroutine for the Bonus preparation state process at the time of receiving the display determination command is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-4-1-1-1-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-1-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the first Bonus is waiting. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the first Bonus standby is performed based on the value stored in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the first Bonus is waiting (step S302-3-4-1-1-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-1-1-1-3. If it is determined that the first Bonus is not waiting (step S302-3-4-1-1-1-2 = No), step S302-3-4-1-1-1-5 is performed. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-4-1-1-1-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-1-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the first Bonus state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the first Bonus state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the first Bonus state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-1-1-1-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-1-1-1-4.

(Step S302-3-4-1-1-1-4)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-1-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “30” to the value of the first Bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “30” to the value of the first bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. And if the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-1-4 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S302-3-4-1-1-1-10.

(Step S302-3-4-1-1-1-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-1-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the second Bonus is waiting. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the second Bonus standby is based on the value stored in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the second Bonus is waiting (step S302-3-4-1-1-1-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-1-1-1-6. If it is determined that the second Bonus is not waiting (step S302-3-4-1-1-1-5 = No), step S302-3-4-1-1-1-8 is performed. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-4-1-1-1-6)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-1-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the second Bonus state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the second Bonus state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the second Bonus state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-1-1-1-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-1-1-1-7.

(Step S302-3-4-1-1-1-7)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-1-7, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “40” to the value of the second Bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “40” to the value of the second bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. And if the process of step S302-3-4-1-1-1-7 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S302-3-4-1-1-1-10.

(Step S302-3-4-1-1-1-8)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-1-8, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for changing the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the third Bonus state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the third Bonus state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the third Bonus state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-1-1-1-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-1-1-1-9.

(Step S302-3-4-1-1-1-9)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-1-9, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the third Bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the third bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-1-1-1-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-1-1-1-10.

(Step S302-3-4-1-1-1-10)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-1-10, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “0” to the value of the ceiling game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-4-1-1-1-10 is completed, the subroutine for the Bonus preparation state process at the time of display determination command reception is terminated, and step S302-3-1-6 of the command-specific process is completed. The process is transferred to.

(Processing for the first fall standby state when a display judgment command is received)
Next, based on FIG. 74, the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the first fall standby state in the display command reception state transition process in step S302-3-4-1 of FIG. The process for the first fall standby state at the time of display determination command reception performed in this case is described. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the first fall standby state process when a display determination command is received.

(Step S302-3-4-1-2-1)
In step S302-3-4-1-2-1-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a blank is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the symbol combination related to “blank” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that a blank is displayed (step S302-3-4-1-2-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-1-1-2-2. If it is determined that no blank is displayed (step S302-3-4-1-2-1 = No), the first fall standby state processing subroutine upon reception of the display determination command is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-4-1-1-2-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-2-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the normal state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the normal state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the normal state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-1-1-2-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-1-1-2-3.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-2-2-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-2-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “999” to the value of the ceiling game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “999” to the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-4-1-4-2-3 is completed, the subroutine for the first fall standby state process upon reception of the display determination command is terminated, and step S302-3-1 of the command-specific process is completed. The process is shifted to -6.

(Process for ART ready state when receiving display judgment command)
Next, based on FIG. 75, when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the ART ready state in the display command reception state transition process in step S302-3-4-1 of FIG. The process for the ART preparation state at the time of display determination command reception to be performed will be described. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the ART preparation state processing when a display determination command is received.

(Step S302-3-4-1-3-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-3-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not an ART replay is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not a symbol combination related to “ART replay” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that the ART replay has been displayed (step S302-3-4-1-3-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-1-4-1-2. When it is determined that the ART replay is not displayed (step S302-3-4-1-3-1 = No), the subroutine for the ART preparation state process upon reception of the display determination command is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-3-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-3-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for changing the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the ART state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the ART state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the ART state. And if the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-3-2 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S302-3-1-4-1-3-3.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-3-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-3-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “50” to the value of the ART state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “50” to the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-1-3-3 is completed, the subroutine of the ART preparation state process at the time of display determination command reception is terminated, and step S302-3-6-1-6 of the command-specific process is completed. The process is transferred to.

(Process for the first extra preparation state when a display judgment command is received)
Next, based on FIG. 76, the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the first addition preparation state in the display command reception state transition process in step S302-3-4-1 of FIG. The process for the first addition preparation state at the time of display determination command reception performed in this case will be described. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the first added state processing when a display determination command is received.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-4-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-4-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a RUSH replay is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not a symbol combination related to “RUSH replay” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that the RUSH replay has been displayed (step S302-3-4-1-4-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-1-4-2. If it is determined that the RUSH replay is not displayed (step S302-3-1-4-1-4-1 = No), the first addition preparation state processing subroutine upon reception of the display determination command , And the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-6 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-4-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-4-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the first added state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the first added state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the first added state. And if the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-4-2 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S302-3-1-4-1-4-3.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-4-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-4-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “10” to the value of the first added state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “10” to the value of the first added state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-4-3 is completed, the subroutine for the first addition preparation state process upon reception of the display determination command is terminated, and step S302-3-1 of the command-specific process is completed. The process is shifted to -6.

(Process for the second extra preparation state when a display judgment command is received)
Next, based on FIG. 77, the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the second addition preparation state in the display command reception state transition process in step S302-3-4-1 of FIG. The processing for second addition preparation state at the time of display determination command reception performed in this case will be described. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing for a second addition preparation state when a display determination command is received.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-5-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-5-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a special replay is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a symbol combination related to “special replay” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that the special replay is displayed (step S302-3-1-4-1-5-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-4-1-5-2. If it is determined that the special replay is not displayed (step S302-3-4-1-5-1 = No), the second addition preparation state processing subroutine upon reception of the display determination command , And the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-6 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-4-1-1-5-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-5-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the second addition state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the second added state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the second added state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-5-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-4-1-5-3.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-5-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-5-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “20” to the value of the second added state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “20” to the value of the second added state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-5-3 is completed, the subroutine for the second addition preparation state process upon reception of the display determination command is terminated, and step S302-3-1 of the process for each command is completed. The process is shifted to -6.

(Processing for the second fall standby state when receiving the display judgment command)
Next, based on FIG. 78, the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the second fall standby state in the display command reception state transition process in step S302-3-4-1 of FIG. The processing for the second fall standby state at the time of display determination command reception performed in this case will be described. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the second fall standby state process when a display determination command is received.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-6-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-6-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not an ART replay is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not a symbol combination related to “ART replay” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that the ART replay has been displayed (step S302-3-4-1-6-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-1-1-6-2. If it is determined that the ART replay is not displayed (step S302-3-4-1-6-1 = No), a subroutine for the second fall standby state process upon reception of the display determination command is performed. , And the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-6 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-6-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-6-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for changing the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the ART state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the ART state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the ART state. When the process of step S302-3-4-1-6-2 is completed, the subroutine for the second fall standby state process upon reception of the display determination command is terminated, and step S302-3-1 of the command-specific process is completed. The process is shifted to -6.

(Processing for the third fall standby state when a display judgment command is received)
Next, based on FIG. 79, the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the third fall standby state in the display command reception state transition process in step S302-3-4-1 of FIG. The process for the third fall standby state at the time of display determination command reception performed in this case will be described. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a subroutine of third fall standby state processing when a display determination command is received.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-7-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-7-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not an ART replay is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not a symbol combination related to “ART replay” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that the ART replay is displayed (step S302-3-1-4-1-7-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-4-1-7-2. If it is determined that the ART replay is not displayed (step S302-3-4-1-7-1 = No), the third fall standby state processing subroutine upon reception of the display determination command , And the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-6 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-7-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-7-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for changing the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the ART state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the ART state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the ART state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-7-2 is completed, the subroutine for the second fall standby state process upon reception of the display determination command is terminated, and step S302-3-1 of the command-specific process is completed. The process is shifted to -6.

(Process for 4th fall waiting state when display judgment command is received)
Next, based on FIG. 80, the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the fourth fall standby state in the display command reception state transition process in step S302-3-4-1 of FIG. The processing for the fourth fall standby state at the time of display determination command reception performed in this case will be described. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the fourth fall standby state process when a display determination command is received.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-8-1)
In step S302-3-4-1-8-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a blank is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the symbol combination related to “blank” is displayed on the active line. And when it determines with the blank being displayed (step S302-3-1-4-1-8-1 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-1-4-1-8-2. If it is determined that no blank is displayed (step S302-3-1-4-1-8-1 = No), the fourth fall standby state processing subroutine upon reception of the display determination command is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-8-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-8-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the normal state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the normal state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the normal state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-8-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-4-1-8-3.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-8-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-8-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “999” as the value of the ceiling game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “999” to the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-8-3 ends, the subroutine for the fourth fall standby state process at the time of display determination command reception ends, and step S302-3-1 of the command-specific process ends. The process is shifted to -6.

  If the sub CPU 401 determines in the above-described display determination command reception process that the symbol combination related to winning with payout has been displayed, the sub CPU 401 receives the speaker (upper left speaker 40, lower left speaker) via the effect control board 600. Control is performed so that a payout sound is emitted from the upper speaker 41, the upper right speaker 42, and the lower right speaker 43). Note that the timing at which the payout sound is output is not limited to the display determination. For example, the payout process is performed in step S120 in FIG. 36, and the payout sound is output when the payout of the medal is detected. May be.

  Further, as described above, the sub CPU 401 transmits an effect designation command to the effect control board 600 when a predetermined effect occurs. In addition, when the sub CPU 401 receives a command indicating the specific detection result (error detection result or the like), the sub CPU 401 transmits an output designation command to the effect control board 600.

  When receiving the effect designation command from the sub CPU 401, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 of the effect control board 600 determines audio data to be output in the designated effect based on the effect designation command, and sends a predetermined sound to the sound source IC 605. The audio data is output from the sound source ROM 606 or the like to the respective speakers (the upper left speaker 40, the lower left speaker 41, the upper right speaker 42, and the lower right speaker 43) via the amplifier board 500. In addition, when receiving the output designation command from the sub CPU 401, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 of the effect control board 600 transmits the output designation command to the sound source IC 605. The sound source IC 605 receives predetermined audio data based on the output designation command from the sound source ROM 606 or the like via the amplifier board 500, and the respective speakers (the upper left speaker 40, the lower left speaker 41, the upper right speaker 42, and the lower right speaker 43). To output.

  Furthermore, when the liquid crystal control CPU 601 outputs the audio data stored in the sound source ROM 606 to the respective speakers (the upper left speaker 40, the lower left speaker 41, the upper right speaker 42, and the lower right speaker 43), the liquid crystal control CPU 601 is designated in advance. Audio data to be output to a channel and audio data to be output by searching a predetermined channel at any given time are classified.

  Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 is configured to specify each channel of the upper left speaker 40, the lower left speaker 41, the upper right speaker 42, and the lower right speaker 43 as a fixed channel that specifies the output destination of specific audio data. And a variable channel for searching for a predetermined output destination when outputting audio data. Then, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 uses the channels for the upper left speaker 40, the lower left speaker 41, the upper right speaker 42, and the lower right speaker 43 as six fixed channels of 00CH to 05CH and 34 channels of 06CH to 39CH as variable channels. It is said.

  The audio data in which a fixed channel is designated as the output destination includes the abnormality notification data for notifying the abnormality of the gaming machine 1, the warning notification data for notifying the warning, the operation sound data relating to the operation essential for the progress of the game, etc. This applies to voices that must be played with priority. Examples of the audio data include audio data such as a door opening, a BET sound, etc. when the setting change device operation is abnormal. That is, the system sound described above corresponds to the sound output from the fixed channel. In addition, as sound data for the variable channel, an effect sound or the like for an effect performed for each game is set, for example, a BGM during a game, an effect button operation sound, or the like is set.

  The liquid crystal control CPU 601 processes each speaker (the upper left speaker 40, the lower left speaker 41, the upper right speaker 42, and the lower right speaker 43) according to the output designation destination of the speaker and the status of the empty channel. However, the processing for each speaker (the upper left speaker 40, the lower left speaker 41, the upper right speaker 42, the lower right speaker 43) is the same processing, so the details of the processing for each speaker will be described. Omitted.

(Main processing on production control board)
Next, the main process in the effect control board 600 will be described with reference to FIG.

(Step S401)
In step S401, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs an initialization process. Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs processing such as error checking of the liquid crystal control RAM 603. The liquid crystal control CPU 601 also performs initialization (clearing) processing of the storage areas of the output target empty channel, the output stop target channel, and the output stopped channel in the channel information storage area of the liquid crystal control RAM 603. Then, when the process of step S401 ends, the process proceeds to step S402.

(Step S402)
In step S402, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs a sound reproduction control process that will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 analyzes a command transmitted from the sub-control board 400 and performs a sound reproduction process and the like. Then, when the process of step S402 ends, the process proceeds to step S403.

(Step S403)
In step S403, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs an effect control execution process. Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 uses the rendering device sensors (upper left rendering device sensor 652s, lower left rendering device sensor 653s, upper right rendering device sensor) via the command transmitted from the sub-control board 400 and the rendering device drive board 650. 655 s, lower right rendering device sensor 656 s), liquid crystal display sensors (upper left liquid crystal lift sensor 658 s, lower left liquid crystal lift sensor 659 s, upper right liquid crystal lift sensor 661 s, lower right liquid crystal lift sensor 662 s) based on the liquid crystal display Effect image display processing for the device 46, effect device motors (left effect device motor 651, right effect device motor 654), liquid crystal lift motors (left liquid crystal lift motor 657, right liquid crystal lift motor 660) via the effect device drive board 650 ), Drive control processing of the production device 50, production device drive relay base Performing lamp control processing and the like via 750. And when the process of step S403 is complete | finished, the main process in the production | presentation control board 600 will be complete | finished.

(Sound playback control processing)
Next, the sound reproduction control process performed by the process of step S402 of FIG. 81 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 82 shows a subroutine for sound reproduction control processing.

(Step S402-1)
In step S402-1, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs a system sound determination process. In this processing, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs processing for determining whether an output designation command has been received. When receiving the output designation command, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 updates the information of the fixed channel to be used based on the output designation command, and outputs the output designation command to a desired device such as the sound source IC 605 or the VDP 607. Process. Then, when the process of step S402-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S402-2.

(Step S402-2)
In step S402-2, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines whether an effect designation command has been received. In this process, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 analyzes a command received from the sub control board 400 and performs a process of determining whether or not an effect designation command has been received. If it is determined that an effect designation command has been received (step S402-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S402-3, and if it is determined that an effect designation command has not been received (step S402). -2 = No), the sound reproduction control process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S403 of the main process in the effect control board 600.

(Step S402-3)
In step S402-3, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines sound data to be output based on the effect designation command (hereinafter referred to as effect output sound data), and the sound data having the same sound number as the determined effect output sound data is reproduced. It is determined whether it is in the middle. That is, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines whether or not the same audio data as the production output audio data is currently being reproduced. If it is determined that the sound data having the same sound number is being reproduced (step S402-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S402-4, and the sound data having the same sound number is not being reproduced. Is determined (step S402-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S402-5.

(Step S402-4)
In step S402-4, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs playback sound stop processing. Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs a process of stopping output from the channel that is reproducing the sound data having the same sound number as the effect output sound data searched in the process of step S402-3. The liquid crystal control CPU 601 stores the channel number at which the reproduction output of the audio data is stopped in the storage area of the output stopped channel in the channel information storage area of the liquid crystal control RAM 603. Then, when the process of step S402-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S402-9.

(Step S402-5)
In step S402-5, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs an empty channel search process. This empty channel search process will be described later. In this process, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches for an empty channel by a search method described later, and stores the found empty channel in the storage area of the output target empty channel in the channel information area of the liquid crystal control RAM 603. Then, when the process of step S402-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S402-6.

(Step S402-6)
In step S402-6, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines whether there is an empty channel. Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines whether or not empty channel information is stored in the storage area of the output target empty channel in the channel information area of the liquid crystal control RAM 603. The liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines that there is an empty channel if the empty channel information is stored in the output target empty channel storage area, and the empty channel information is stored in the output target empty channel storage area. It is determined that there is no free channel. If it is determined that there is an empty channel (step S402-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S402-9, and if it is determined that there is no empty channel (step S402-6 = No). ), And the process proceeds to step S402-7.

(Step S402-7)
In step S402-7, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs a stop channel search process. This stop channel search process will be described later. In this process, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches for a stop channel by a search method described later, and stores the found stop channel in the storage area of the output stop target channel in the channel information area of the liquid crystal control RAM 603. Then, when the process of step S402-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S402-8.

(Step S402-8)
In step S402-8, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs playback sound stop processing. Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 reproduces the audio data being reproduced from the stop channel searched in the process of step S402-7, that is, the channel stored in the storage area of the output stop target channel in the channel information area of the liquid crystal control RAM 603. Processing to stop the output of. The liquid crystal control CPU 601 stores the channel number at which the reproduction output of the audio data is stopped in the storage area of the output stopped channel in the channel information area of the liquid crystal control RAM 603. Then, when the process of step S402-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S402-9.

(Step S402-9)
In step S402-9, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs a channel setting process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs a process of setting a channel for outputting the audio data scheduled to be output this time. Then, when the process of step S402-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S402-10.

(Step S402-10)
In step S402-10, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs sound reproduction execution processing. In this process, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs a process of reproducing and outputting the audio data scheduled to be output this time for the set channel. When the process of step S402-10 is completed, the sound reproduction control process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S403 of the main process in the effect control board 600.

(Free channel search process)
Here, the empty channel search process will be described.

  In the empty channel search process, first, it is determined whether or not the output channel of the audio data requested to be output is designated in advance. That is, it is determined whether the designated audio data is fixed channel audio data or variable channel audio data.

  If the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines that the designated audio data is audio data for a fixed channel, the unique channel number to which the designated audio data is to be output is set as an empty channel, and this channel number is set. Then, it is stored in the storage area of the output target empty channel in the channel information area of the liquid crystal control RAM 603.

If the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines that the designated audio data is the audio data for the variable channel, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches whether there is an empty channel in the variable channel, that is, 06CH to 39CH.
The variable channel empty channel search method is roughly divided into whether the audio data to be output is stereo audio data or monaural audio data.

  When the audio data to be output is stereo audio data, it is searched from the upper channel whether two channels are continuously available from the even channel number.

  That is, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 first determines whether 06CH and 07CH are vacant. If the 06CH and 07CH are not vacant, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 next determines whether the 08CH and 09CH are vacant.

  If the 08CH and 09CH are not available, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches in the same way in the lower direction until a free space is found. The liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines whether or not 38CH and 39CH are free. If not, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines that there is no free channel. The liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines that there is an empty channel when an empty channel is found during the search, and stores the searched channel number in the storage area of the output target empty channel in the channel information area of the liquid crystal control RAM 603.

  On the other hand, if the audio data to be output is monaural audio data, one of the two channels, an even channel number and the next odd channel number, is in use and the other is free. Search whether there is.

  If there is no empty channel that is not paired, an empty channel search is performed from the lower channels. That is, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches for free channels from 39CH to 38CH, 37CH... 06CH in the upper direction. Since it is known that there is no empty channel in the pair, it is possible to search only for odd channels. If a free channel is found by this search, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines that there is a free channel and stores the searched channel number in the storage area of the output target free channel in the channel information area of the liquid crystal control RAM 603.

(Stop channel search process)
Next, stop channel search processing will be described.
Note that the stop channel search process is in progress to stop part of the currently output audio data and free up an output channel when there is no available channel for outputting new audio data. This is a process for searching for a channel to stop the audio data. Further, there are several methods for the stop channel search process as described below.

  First, in the stop channel search process, a stop channel is searched based on the priority of output of audio data.

  In the stop channel search process based on the priority order, the priority order of the audio data scheduled to be output this time is included in the search condition, and the stop channel is searched. If the priority of the audio data scheduled to be output this time is included in the search condition, depending on the priority of the audio data scheduled to be output this time and the priority of the audio data being output, there is no stop channel that matches the search condition. In some cases, audio data to be output is not output.

  On the other hand, it is possible to search for the stop channel without including the priority order of the audio data scheduled to be output this time in the search condition. If the priority of the audio data scheduled to be output this time is not included in the search condition, any channel outputting audio data can be searched as a stop channel, and the audio data scheduled to be output this time is output from the searched channel. be able to.

  In addition, in the search process of the stop channel based on the priority order, when the priority order of the audio data scheduled to be output this time is included in the search condition, the search priority is the same as the priority order of the audio data scheduled to be output this time. It can be included or it can be included.

  If the search priority does not include data with the same priority as the audio data scheduled to be output this time, the audio data with the priority higher than the priority of the audio data scheduled to be output will be searched. The search is performed only from the audio data that is lower than the priority of the audio data scheduled to be output this time. Therefore, if there is no audio data whose priority is lower than the priority of the audio data scheduled to be output this time, there is no stop channel that matches the search condition, and the audio data scheduled to be output this time is output. I won't let you.

  On the other hand, if the priority of the audio data scheduled to be output this time is included in the search target, the priority of the audio data being output is higher than the priority of the audio data scheduled to be output this time. The search is excluded from the search target, and the search is performed only from the audio data of the priority order or lower that is scheduled to be output this time. In this case, if the audio data being output has only audio data with a higher priority than the priority of the audio data scheduled to be output this time, there is no stop channel corresponding to the search condition, and the audio data scheduled to be output this time Do not output.

  Next, a method for determining a stop channel when the priority order of audio data to be searched is the same will be described. In the present embodiment, when the priority order is the same, the following two examples will be described as a stop channel determination method.

  Here, as a method for determining the first stop channel, a method in which the audio data being output with a short remaining reproduction time is determined as a stop channel from the channel being output. In addition, as a method for determining the second stop channel, a method in which the oldest channel in which the output of the audio data being output is started is determined as the stop channel from the channel being output.

  As a method of determining the stop channel, the audio data being output that has a long remaining playback time is determined as the stop channel from the channel being output, or a new one in the order in which the output of the audio data being output is started The channel being output may be determined as a stop channel, or the audio data being output having a short total reproduction time may be determined as the stop channel from the channel being output.

  In addition, as a method of determining the stop channel, when determining that the remaining playback time of the audio data being output is short from the channel being output as the stop channel, compare it with the playback time of the audio data scheduled to be output this time. Also good. In other words, when the remaining playback time of the searched audio data being output is longer than the playback time of the audio data scheduled to be output this time, the channel on which the searched audio data is being output is excluded from the target of the stop channel. May be.

(Channel setting process)
Next, based on FIG. 83, the channel setting process performed by the process of step S402-9 of FIG. 82 will be described. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a subroutine of channel setting processing.

(Step S402-9-1)
In step S402-9-1, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines whether there is a stopped channel. That is, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines whether or not a predetermined channel is stored in the storage area of the output stopped channel in the channel information area of the liquid crystal control RAM 603. If it is determined that there is a stopped channel (step S402-9-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S402-9-2. If it is determined that there is no stopped channel ( Step S402-9-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S402-9-3.

(Step S402-9-2)
In step S402-9-2, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs a stop channel setting process. In this process, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs a process of setting the channel stored in the storage area of the output stopped channel in the channel information area of the liquid crystal control RAM 603 as a channel for reproducing and outputting the audio data scheduled to be output this time. When the process of step S402-9-2 ends, the channel setting process ends, and the process proceeds to step S402-10 of the sound reproduction control process.

(Step S402-9-3)
In step S402-9-3, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs an empty channel setting process. In this process, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs a process of setting the channel stored in the storage area of the output target empty channel in the channel information area of the liquid crystal control RAM 603 as a channel for reproducing and outputting the audio data scheduled to be output this time. When the process of step S402-9-3 ends, the channel setting process ends, and the process proceeds to step S402-10 of the sound reproduction control process.

  It should be noted that a liquid crystal control interrupt process (not shown) occurs at a predetermined interval with respect to the main process in the effect control board 600. In this liquid crystal control interrupt process, a process for updating the remaining reproduction time of each channel in the channel state management map in the channel information storage area of the liquid crystal control RAM 603 is performed.

  Next, FIGS. 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 90, 93, 94, 95, 96, timing charts of FIGS. 89, 91, and FIG. The present invention will be described with reference to the sound volume graph of FIG.

(Explanation of timing chart terminology)
First, terms used in the timing chart will be described. First, “music A” is, for example, BGM output from a speaker (upper left speaker 40, lower left speaker 41, upper right speaker 42, lower right speaker 43) based on music data stored in the sound source ROM 606. (Background music). The sound source ROM 606 may store music data corresponding to “Song B”, music data corresponding to “Song C”, and the like in addition to music data corresponding to “Music A”.

  Next, “mute” means that the music is output (ON) but no sound is output, and when “mute” is ON, “sound” described later is in a mute state. Become. On the other hand, when “Mute” is OFF, “Sound” described later is in a sound output state.

  Next, “sound” represents a sound based on “song A”, and when “mute” described above is OFF, “sound” based on “song A” represents a sound output state. If “Mute” is ON, “Sound” based on “Song A” is muted. It is configured so that the sound is gradually output when the sound is changed from the mute state to the sound output state, and is gradually turned off when the sound is changed from the sound output state to the mute state. Since it is configured, in FIGS. 84 to 88, it is partially represented by a curve.

  Next, the “successful sound” is a sound that is output when it is determined that the player is in an advantageous state for the player and the determination result is notified to the player. Note that the state advantageous to the player corresponds to a bonus game such as a big bonus or a regular bonus, a special game such as an RT game state, an ART state, or an AT state, or an additional game with the number of games in the ART state.

  Next, the “BET sound” is a sound generated to notify the player that a medal has been inserted based on the insertion of a medal necessary for the game. It should be noted that the insertion of medals necessary for the game is performed under the situation where a predetermined number of medals are stored, the BET button 7 or the MAXBET button 8 is operated, or the predetermined number of medals are not stored. This is done by inserting a medal from the medal slot 6. The number of medals required for a game is three per game, but may be two per game or one per game.

  Next, the “reel rotation start sound” refers to a reel (left reel 18, middle reel 19) based on the player operating the start lever 10 in a situation where medals necessary for the game are inserted. , A sound that is output to notify the player that the rotation of the right reel 20) has started.

  Next, the “stop sound” is a sound generated to notify the player that the reel has stopped based on the stop button being operated by the player. Specifically, the left stop button 11 corresponding to the left reel 18 is operated and the left reel 18 is stopped, and the middle stop button 12 corresponding to the middle reel 19 is operated and the middle reel 19 is stopped. When the right stop button 13 corresponding to the right reel 20 is operated and the right reel 20 stops, a sound is output. Therefore, in FIGS. 84 to 88, three stop sounds corresponding to each of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are emitted.

  Next, the “payout sound” is a sound that is emitted in synchronism with the payout of medals after the symbol combination with payout is stopped on the active line. In addition, the sound is generated to notify the player that the payout has been made. For example, when the symbol combination of “Bell A”, “Bell A”, and “Bell A” is stopped on the active line, nine payouts are made, and a payout sound constituted by a payout time described later is generated. Sound is emitted.

  Next, the “sound that prompts the operation of the effect button” is a sound that is output when the operation of the effect button 21 in the operation acceptance state is prompted. For example, in one game, at the timing after all the stop buttons are operated, a sound such as “Press!” Is output together with the effect button image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46, so that the effect button 21 is displayed to the player. Prompt for operation. The production button 21 is not always in the operation acceptance state, but changes from the operation non-acceptance state to the operation acceptance state and from the operation acceptance state to the operation non-acceptance state.

  Next, the “failure sound” is a sound that is emitted when the determination result is notified to the player when it is not determined to shift to a state advantageous to the player. Note that the state advantageous to the player corresponds to a bonus game such as a big bonus or a regular bonus, a special game such as an RT game state, an ART state, or an AT state, or an additional game with the number of games in the ART state.

  Note that the “sound” is not limited to the example given above. For example, when the start lever 10 is operated by the player in a situation where medals necessary for the game are inserted, the start lever 10 The start lever 10 was operated by the player in a situation where a “lever sound” sounded to notify the player of the operation or a medal necessary for the game was inserted. When the rotation start condition is not satisfied (when the so-called wait time has not elapsed), a sound is output to notify the player that the reel rotation start condition is not satisfied (in the wait state). “Waiting sound” and the like can also be included in the “sound” mentioned above.

  Next, “Song B” is the same as “Song A” described above, for example, based on the music data stored in the sound source ROM 606, the speakers (upper left speaker 40, lower left speaker 41, upper right speaker 42). BGM output from the lower right speaker 43) corresponds to this. Note that “Song A” and “Song B” are composed of different songs.

  Note that “Sound” in FIG. 88 corresponds to “Song A” and “Song B”. That is, when “Song A” is ON, “Sound” based on “Song A” is output, and when “Song B” is ON, “Sound” is based on “Song B”. "Will be output.

(Detailed explanation of timing chart)
84 to 88, for example, it is assumed that you are staying in a chance zone that moves with a predetermined probability when winning a watermelon with a winning number “25” or a weak cherry with a winning number “26”. ing. In this chance zone, a lottery for shifting to a state advantageous to the player (for example, Bonus preparation state) is performed with a transition probability (for example, a lottery probability based on FIG. 25C) according to the winning combination. From the time when a medal is betted and the start lever 10 is operated (after the game is started), until a lottery result for shifting to a state advantageous to the player (for example, a Bonus preparation state) is derived (the game ends) Up to). The lottery result is derived by operating the effect button 21. In the chance zone, the lottery transition to the Bonus ready state is performed with the lottery probability based on FIG. 25C. However, all the winning combinations are advantageous to the player (for example, the Bonus ready state). A lottery to be transferred may be performed, or a lottery to be shifted to a state advantageous to the player (for example, Bonus preparation state) only when a specific combination (for example, a bell combination or a replay combination) is established. . The chance zone corresponds to the aforementioned “chance state” (see FIG. 22). In the chance zone, the operation of the effect button 21 is not necessarily provided, and whether or not to shift to a state advantageous to the player at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed after the third stop operation is performed. A configuration may be used in which a success sound or a failure sound is output based on the determination result. In addition, although the operation of the effect button 21 is provided, if the operation of the effect button 21 is not performed by the player within the operation effective period, a success sound or a failure sound is automatically output after the operation effective period has elapsed. It may be a configuration.

  The chance zone is composed of a plurality of games (for example, 10 games). In FIG. 85, the chance zone represents a game other than the last game in the chance zone (for example, the first game to the ninth game). Represents the final game (for example, the 10th game) in the chance zone. 84 to 86, the sound is muted by muting, and in FIG. 87, the sound is muted by temporarily stopping. In FIG. 88, “Song A” is stopped and muted, and then “Song B” is output. Note that “Song A” or “Song B” is a song that is output during the chance zone.

(Timing chart 1 in FIG. 84)
First, at timing (A) in the timing chart 1 of FIG. 84, a BET sound is produced by the player operating the BET button 7 or the MAXBET button 8. At timing (A), music A is turned on. At timing (A), a sound is emitted. That is, a sound based on the music A is produced by operating the BET button 7 and the MAXBET button 8 which are game start operations.

  Next, at timing (B), the BET sound is muted. In other words, when the BET button 7 or the MAXBET button 8 that is a game start operation is performed, a BET sound and a sound based on the music A are emitted, but the BET sound is a bet on the medal. Immediately after this is notified, the sound is muted.

  Next, at timing (C), based on the start lever 10 being operated by the player, reel rotation is started and a reel rotation start sound is produced. After the reel rotation start sound is output, the reel rotation start sound is muted at timing (D). That is, the reel rotation start sound is immediately muted after notifying that the reel has started rotating.

  Next, at the timing (E), the stop button is operated by the player, and the stop sound is generated by stopping the reel. Then, after the stop sound is output, the stop sound is muted at timing (F). That is, the stop sound is immediately muted after notifying that the stop button has been operated. For convenience, the description will be made assuming that the stop button is operated in the order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. Therefore, the stop sound that is output at timing (E) and muted at timing (F) corresponds to the stop sound of the left reel 18 that is stopped by operating the left stop button 11.

  Next, at the timing (G), the stop button is operated by the player, and the stop sound is emitted by stopping the reel. Then, after the stop sound is output, the stop sound is muted at timing (H). That is, the stop sound is immediately muted after notifying that the stop button has been operated. The stop sound that is output at timing (G) and muted at timing (H) corresponds to the stop sound of the middle reel 19 that is stopped by operating the middle stop button 12.

  Next, at the timing (I), the stop button is operated by the player, and the stop sound is emitted by stopping the reel. After the stop sound is output, the stop sound is muted at timing (J). That is, the stop sound is immediately muted after notifying that the stop button has been operated. The stop sound that is output at timing (I) and muted at timing (J) corresponds to the stop sound of the right reel 20 that is stopped by operating the right stop button 13.

  Next, at timing (K), a payout sound is emitted on the active line based on the fact that the symbol combination with payout has stopped. In the example in FIG. 84, the explanation will be made assuming that “push order bell A1” of the winning number “32” is determined as the winning combination. Therefore, the symbol combination of the left “bell A”, the middle “bell A”, and the right “bell A” constituting the “push order bell A1” is stopped on the effective line. After the payout sound is output, the payout sound is muted at timing (L). Note that the sound based on the music A is gradually muted from the timing (J) when the third stop operation is performed to the timing (L) when the payout sound is muted.

  Next, at timing (L), the payout sound is muted, the mute is turned on, and the sound based on the music A is muted. In addition, a sound prompting the user to operate the effect button (effect button 21) is output. The voice prompting the operation of the effect button is, for example, a voice such as “Press!”. Then, after the sound for prompting the operation of the effect button is output, the sound for prompting the operation of the effect button is muted at timing (M). That is, the sound prompting the operation of the effect button is immediately muted after the notification for prompting the operation of the effect button is performed.

  Although not shown, at time (L), the effect button 21 changes from the operation non-acceptance state to the operation acceptance state. When in this operation acceptance state, the operation of the effect button 21 is accepted. If the effect button 21 is operated while in this operation acceptance state, in the example of FIG. 84, the lottery result (winning) to be shifted to a state advantageous to the player (for example, the ART state) is obtained. It has come to inform. The operation acceptance state is configured from a predetermined time, and the operation acceptance state corresponds to the operation valid period in the present invention.

  In the case of winning, since the state shifts from the chance zone to, for example, the Bonus preparation state, the music A that is turned on in the chance zone is turned off. The second period in the present invention corresponds to the period from the timing (L) to the timing (N) in FIG. Further, the first period in the present invention corresponds to the period from timing (A) to timing (L) in FIG. Note that the first period may be from timing (A) in FIG. 84 to timing (J) before the sound is gradually muted.

  Then, at timing (N), a success sound is output, thereby informing that the state is shifted to a state advantageous to the player (for example, ART state). Then, the sound output of the music A is turned off, and the mute is also turned off. At timing (O), the success sound is silenced.

  As described above, in the period from the timing (L) to the timing (N), which is the second period, the mute is turned on so that the sound based on the music that has been output so far is in the mute state. By changing the sound output situation in this way, it is possible to notify that the timing for notifying whether or not to shift to the privilege game advantageous for the player set after the timing (L) has arrived. , Can make the attention point clear.

  In the description of FIG. 84 described above, a pachislot machine has been described as an example. However, the same description as that of FIG. 84 can be applied even during reach in a pachinko machine. For example, in a pachinko machine equipped with an effect that informs whether it is a win or a miss by pressing the effect button after developing to super reach, muting is performed before the effect button pressing timing. To mute the sound. If comprised in this way, the effect similar to the effect in the said pachislot will be acquired.

(Timing chart 2 in FIG. 85)
Next, description will be made with reference to the timing chart 2 of FIG. 85 is another example of FIG. 84, and therefore, in FIG. 85, description of the same parts as in FIG. 84 is omitted, and only differences from FIG. 84 will be described.

  In the example of FIG. 85, a lottery result (out of date) that is not shifted to a state advantageous to the player (for example, ART state) is notified. If there is a remaining number of games in the chance zone when there is a loss, the music A that is turned on in the chance zone is kept on in order to shift to the next game in the chance zone.

  In other words, at the timing (N), a failure sound is output, thereby notifying that the state is not shifted to a state advantageous to the player (for example, the ART state). Then, the sound output of the music A is kept ON, and the mute is turned OFF. Then, at timing (O), the failure sound is silenced, and the process proceeds to the next game in the chance zone. The second period in the present invention corresponds to the period from timing (L) to timing (N) in FIG. Further, the first period in the present invention corresponds to the period from the timing (A) to the timing (L) in FIG. Note that the first period may be from timing (A) in FIG. 85 to timing (J) before the sound is gradually muted.

  As described above, in the period from the timing (L) to the timing (N), which is the second period, as in FIG. 84, the mute is turned on, so that the sound based on the music that has been output is muted. . By changing the sound output situation in this way, it is possible to notify that the timing for notifying whether or not to shift to the privilege game advantageous for the player set after the timing (L) has arrived. , Can make the attention point clear.

(Timing chart 3 in FIG. 86)
Next, description will be made with reference to the timing chart 3 of FIG. Note that FIG. 86 is another example of FIG. 84, so in FIG. 86, the description of the same part as in FIG. 84 is omitted, and only the difference from FIG.

  In the example of FIG. 86, a lottery result (out of date) that is not shifted to a state advantageous to the player (for example, ART state) is notified. In FIG. 86, since the last game in the chance zone is shown, the chance zone ends in the game in which the outage has been notified, so the music A that is turned on in the chance zone is turned off.

  In other words, at the timing (N), a failure sound is output, thereby notifying that the state is not shifted to a state advantageous to the player (for example, the ART state). Then, the sound output of the music A is turned off and the mute is turned off. Then, at the timing (O), the failure zone is silenced and the chance zone is terminated. Note that the second period in the present invention corresponds to the period from the timing (L) to the timing (N) in FIG. Further, the first period in the present invention corresponds to the period from the timing (A) to the timing (L) in FIG. Note that the first period may be from timing (A) in FIG. 86 to timing (J) before the sound is gradually muted.

  As described above, as in FIGS. 84 and 85, in the period from the timing (L) to the timing (N) that is the second period, the mute is turned on to mute the sound based on the music that has been output until then. State. By changing the sound output situation in this way, it is possible to notify that the timing for notifying whether or not to shift to the privilege game advantageous for the player set after the timing (L) has arrived. , Can make the attention point clear.

(Timing chart 4 in FIG. 87)
Next, description will be made with reference to the timing chart 4 of FIG. Note that FIG. 87 is another example of FIG. 84, and therefore, in FIG. 87, description of the same parts as in FIG. 84 is omitted, and only differences from FIG. 84 will be described.

  In the example shown in FIG. 87, a lottery result (displacement) that is not shifted to a state advantageous to the player (for example, ART state) is notified. If there is a remaining number of games in the chance zone when the game is out of place, the next game in the chance zone is shifted to, so the music A that is turned on in the chance zone is turned on again and temporarily Play again from where it was stopped.

  In other words, at the timing (N), a failure sound is output, thereby notifying that the state is not shifted to a state advantageous to the player (for example, the ART state). Then, the sound output of the music A is turned ON again. Then, at timing (O), the failure sound is silenced and the game moves to the next game in the chance zone. The second period in the present invention corresponds to the period from timing (L) to timing (N) in FIG. Further, the first period in the present invention corresponds to the period from the timing (A) to the timing (L) in FIG. Note that the first period may be from timing (A) in FIG. 87 to timing (J) before the sound is gradually muted.

  As described above, in the period from the timing (L) to the timing (N), which is the second period, as in FIGS. The sound based on was made into the mute state. By changing the sound output situation in this way, it is possible to notify that the timing for notifying whether or not to shift to the privilege game advantageous for the player set after the timing (L) has arrived. , Can make the attention point clear.

(Timing chart 5 in FIG. 88)
Next, description will be made with reference to the timing chart 5 of FIG. Since FIG. 88 is another example of FIG. 84, the description of the same parts as those in FIG. 84 is omitted in FIG. 88, and only the differences from FIG. 84 will be described.

  In the example of FIG. 88, a lottery result (out of date) that is not shifted to a state advantageous to the player (for example, the ART state) is notified. In the example of FIG. 88, the music that is output for each game is different. That is, in the game in which the music A is turned on, if it is out of place, the music B different from the music A is output in the next game in the chance zone.

  In other words, at the timing (N), a failure sound is output, thereby notifying that the state is not shifted to a state advantageous to the player (for example, the ART state). Then, the sound output of the music B is turned ON. Then, at timing (O), the failure sound is silenced and the game moves to the next game in the chance zone. The second period in the present invention corresponds to the period from timing (L) to timing (N) in FIG. Further, the first period in the present invention corresponds to the period from timing (A) to timing (L) in FIG. Note that the first period may be from timing (A) in FIG. 88 to timing (J) before the sound is gradually muted.

  As described above, as in FIGS. 84, 85, 86, and 87, in the period from the timing (L) to the timing (N), which is the second period, the music that has been output until then is stopped by stopping the music. The sound based on was made into a mute state. By changing the sound output situation in this way, it is possible to notify that the timing for notifying whether or not to shift to the privilege game advantageous for the player set after the timing (L) has arrived. , Can make the attention point clear.

(Animation in Fig. 89)
Next, an animation effect based on the timing charts of FIGS. 84, 85, 86, 87, and 88 will be described based on FIG. Note that the animation effect shown in FIG. 89 is an effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46.

  First, in FIG. 89 (A), a teammate character image and an enemy character image are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46, and a state in which both characters confront each other is shown. Note that FIG. 89A is displayed from timing (C) to timing (L) in FIGS. 84 to 88.

  Next, in FIG. 89B, an image prompting the player to operate the effect button 21 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46. Note that FIG. 89B is displayed from the timing (L) to the timing (M) in FIGS. 84 to 88.

  Next, in FIG. 89C, an image in which the teammate character has won is displayed. Note that FIG. 89C is displayed from timing (N) to timing (O) in FIG. That is, in the case of a lottery result for shifting to a state advantageous to the player, an image of winning the teammate character is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 together with the sound of the success sound.

  Next, in FIG. 89D, an image in which the teammate character is defeated is displayed. Note that FIG. 89D is displayed from timing (N) to timing (O) in FIGS. That is, in the case of a lottery result that does not shift to a state advantageous to the player, an image in which the teammate character is defeated is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 together with the sound of the failure sound.

(Timing chart 6 in FIG. 90)
Next, description will be made with reference to the timing chart 6 of FIG. Note that “Song A” in FIG. 90 is the same as the contents described in FIGS. 84 to 88 and will not be described. However, as a method of turning off “Song A”, FIG. A method such as mute or pause as described with reference to FIG. 88 can be applied. The “success sound” is a sound that is output when the game in the freeze state described later continues and the number of games is added, and the “failure sound” is a game in the freeze state described later. Is a sound that is output when the game number is not continued and the number of games is not added. “Start sw” indicates detection of operation of the start lever 10 by the start switch 10 sw. That is, when “start sw” is ON, it indicates that the start lever 10 has been operated. When “start sw” is OFF, the start lever 10 has been operated. This indicates a state in which this is not detected. Instead of “start sw”, for example, the MAXBET switch 8sw may detect that the MAXBET button 8 has been operated.

  In FIG. 90, “A melody”, “B melody”, and “rust” are elements constituting the music piece A. For example, when “A melody” is present, the “A melody” portion of the music piece A is reproduced. When “B melody” is present, the “B melody” portion of the music piece A is reproduced, and when “Cabi” is present, the “rust” portion of the music piece A is reproduced. Note that the musical piece A is configured in the order of “A melody”, “B melody”, and “rust”, and “B melody” is configured as a portion connected to “rust”. The “rust” corresponds to the most exciting part of the music piece A. 90, the “A melody” and “B melody” portions of the music piece A constitute a normal reproduction portion in the present invention, and the “rust” portion of the music piece A is a specific reproduction in the present invention. Make up part.

  In FIG. 90, unlike FIGS. 84 to 88, it is assumed that the user is staying in the frozen state, and the number of ART games is increased during the frozen state. Has been. In the freeze state, a game (pseudo game) can be performed a plurality of times only when a continuation rate configured with a predetermined probability is won. In this case, as the number of games is increased, the number of ART games is increased, so whether the game is continued or not is of great interest to the player. In FIG. 90, in the case of continuation, the climax part of the music is reproduced to notify that the game has been continued, and in the case of non-continuation, the climax part of the music is not reproduced. , The game is discontinued. That is, in FIG. 90, the privilege game advantageous to the player corresponds to a game (pseudo game) performed during the freeze state, and it is advantageous for the player to win the continuous lottery of this game (pseudo game). It corresponds to shifting to a special award game, and winning a game (pseudo game) continuation lottery corresponds to not shifting to a privilege game advantageous to the player.

  First, at the timing (A) in FIG. 90 (a), the music A is turned ON, and the reproduction of the A melody portion constituting the music A is started. The reproduction of the A melody part is performed for a predetermined time, and when the predetermined time has elapsed, the reproduction of the B melody part is started.

  Next, at the timing (B) in FIG. 90A, the music A is turned off and the reproduction of the B melody portion is stopped. After that, notification that prompts the user to operate the start lever 10 is performed using, for example, the liquid crystal display device 46 (FIG. 91C described later).

  Next, at timing (C) in FIG. 90 (a), the start lever 10 is operated by the player, and the start sw is turned on. Then, at the timing (D) in FIG. 90 (a), the start sw is turned off and the music piece A is turned on to reproduce the climax part. In addition, at the timing (D) in FIG. 90 (a), the success sound is turned on separately from the music piece A to notify that the number of games will be added as the game continues in the freeze state. It is composed. Note that the success sound is turned off at timing (E) in FIG. 90 (a). Note that the timing (D) in FIG. 90 (a) constitutes the specific timing in the unit game of the present invention. Note that the playback of the B melody portion of the music piece A may be performed until the timing (D) which is the specific timing, or as shown in FIG. 90, until the timing (D) which is the specific timing. May be. However, as shown in FIG. 90, when playback is performed before timing (D), which is the specific timing, the playback end point (timing (B)) of the B melody portion and the specific timing (timing (D)) )) Is preferably shorter in consideration of the connection between the B melody portion and the rust portion, and is assumed to be about 2 to 3 seconds.

  In other words, during the freeze state, until the timing for notifying whether the game (pseudo game) is to be continued or discontinued, the A melody portion and the B melody portion connected to the rust portion are reproduced. When the timing for notifying whether the game is to be continued or not is reached and the game is to be continued, the rust portion connected from the B melody portion is reproduced. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the game during the freeze production has continued by reproducing the most chorus portion in the music, so that it is possible to further improve the entertainment interest. If the first game is continued, another song may be output in the second game.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 90B, at the timing (A), the music A is turned ON, and the reproduction of the A melody portion constituting the music A is started. The reproduction of the A melody part is performed for a predetermined time, and when the predetermined time has elapsed, the reproduction of the B melody part is started.

  Next, at the timing (B) in FIG. 90 (b), the music A is turned off and the reproduction of the B melody portion is stopped. After that, notification that prompts the user to operate the start lever 10 is performed using, for example, the liquid crystal display device 46 (FIG. 91C described later).

  Next, at the timing (C) in FIG. 90B, the start lever 10 is operated by the player, and the start sw is turned on. Then, at the timing (D) in FIG. 90 (b), the start sw is turned off, and the tune A is kept off and the climax part is not reproduced. In addition, at timing (D) in FIG. 90 (b), the failure sound is turned ON to notify the non-continuation of the game during the freeze state. Note that the failure sound is turned off at timing (E) in FIG. 90 (b).

  In other words, when the game is non-continuous, it is possible to give higher value to the reproduction of the chorus part that is performed when the game is continued by not reproducing the chorus part.

  In the description of FIG. 90 described above, a pachislot machine has been described as an example. However, the same description as that of FIG. For example, in the case of a pachinko machine equipped with an effect that informs whether it is a win or not by depressing the effect button after developing to super reach, if the win, it will play the chorus part If it is off, the rust portion is not reproduced. If comprised in this way, the effect similar to the effect in the said pachislot will be acquired.

(Animation in Fig. 91)
Next, an animation effect based on the timing chart of FIG. 90 will be described based on FIG. The animation effect shown in FIG. 91 indicates an effect performed using the liquid crystal display device 46 and the reels (the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20).

  91 is a drawing showing a pseudo game in a frozen state, so the “stop display” used in the description of FIG. 91 is not a state where the symbols are completely stopped and displayed, but a fluctuation display is performed. It refers to the state that has been broken. In FIG. 91, when the start lever 10 is operated (“game start operation” in FIG. 91), a transition is made to the freeze state, and then FIG. 91 (A) is reached. 91 (A), (B), (C), and (D) show that the game is in the freeze state (pseudo game), and FIG. 91 (E) is the game in the freeze state ( (Pseudo game) has ended. That is, after reaching FIG. 91 (E), a game based on the “game start operation” described above is started. That is, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 start to change. On the other hand, as long as the game in the frozen state (pseudo game) is continued, FIG. 91 (E) is not reached and shown in FIGS. 91 (A), (B), (C), and (D). A game (pseudo game) is repeatedly executed.

  First, in FIG. 91A, the left reel 18 is stopped and displayed. At this time, in the left reel 18, the “replay A” symbol is stopped and displayed on the upper left reel, the “blue seven” symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle left reel, and the “cherry” symbol is stopped and displayed on the lower left reel. ing. The reel may be stopped either automatically or manually. On the liquid crystal display device 46, “+10” indicating that the ART game has been added 10 games is displayed, and the appearance that the teammate character is dominant is displayed. That is, 10 games are added based on the fact that the left reel 18 is stopped and displayed. The middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 are changing. FIG. 91A corresponds to timing (A) to timing (B) in the timing chart in FIG.

  Next, in FIG. 91 (B), the right reel 20 is stopped and displayed following the left reel 18. At this time, in the right reel 20, the “watermelon” symbol is stopped and displayed on the upper right reel, the “blue seven” symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle right reel, and the “bell B” symbol is stopped and displayed on the lower right reel. Yes. That is, in this state, the “Blue Seven” symbol in the middle of the left reel and the “Blue Seven” symbol in the middle of the right reel are stopped and displayed, and the “Blue Seven” symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle of the middle reel. The state (listening state of the blue seven symbol) is constructed. The reel may be stopped either automatically or manually. On the liquid crystal display device 46, “+10” indicating that the ART game has been added 10 games is displayed, and the appearance that the teammate character is dominant is displayed. That is, 10 games are added based on the stop display of the right reel 20. Note that the middle reel 19 is changing. FIG. 91B corresponds to timing (B) to timing (C) in the timing chart in FIG.

  Next, in FIG. 91C, the liquid crystal display device 46 displays a display image of “hit the start lever!” Prompting the operation of the start lever 10, and the teammate character and the enemy character face each other. Is displayed. The MAX BET button 8 may be operated without being limited to the start lever. FIG. 91C corresponds to timing (B) to timing (C) in the timing chart in FIG.

  Next, in FIG. 91D, the middle reel 19 is stopped and displayed based on the operation of the start lever 10. At this time, in the middle reel 19, the “watermelon” symbol is stopped and displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel, the “blue seven” symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle stage of the middle reel, and the “replay A” symbol is stopped and displayed on the lower stage of the middle reel. ing. That is, in this state, the “blue seven” symbol in the middle left reel, the “blue seven” symbol in the middle middle reel, and the “blue seven” symbol in the middle right reel are all stopped and displayed. On the liquid crystal display device 46, “+100” (TOTAL +120) indicating that the ART game has been added 100 games is displayed, and a state in which the teammate character is dominant is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 91D, when the “blue seven” symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle line, the game in the freeze state is continued, and the process proceeds to FIG. 91A again. Whether the game in the frozen state is continued or not is continued lottery when the operation of the start lever 10 in FIG. 91 (C) is performed. FIG. 91 (D) corresponds to the timing (D) and thereafter in the timing chart in FIG. 90 (a), and the climax part of the music piece A is being reproduced.

  On the other hand, FIG. 91E shows a state in which the middle reel 19 is stopped and displayed based on the operation of the start lever 10. At this time, in the middle reel 19, the “cherry” symbol is stopped on the upper middle reel, the “watermelon” symbol is stopped on the middle middle reel, and the “blue seven” symbol is stopped on the lower middle reel. . In other words, in this state, the “Blue Seven” symbol in the middle left reel, the “Blue Seven” symbol in the middle reel, and the “Blue Seven” symbol in the middle right reel are all aligned and are not stopped. In the liquid crystal display device 46, “+20”, which is the total number of games added to TOTAL, is displayed, and the appearance that the teammate character is inferior is displayed. As shown in FIG. 91E, when the “blue seven” symbol is not stopped and displayed on the middle line, the game in the freeze state is discontinued and the freeze effect is ended. FIG. 91D corresponds to the timing (D) after the timing chart in FIG. 90B, and the climax part of the music piece A is not reproduced. In addition, the effect pattern corresponding to the character image displayed in FIG. 91 (A) and FIG. 91 (B) selects the effect pattern in which a teammate character predominates with high probability, when a game continues. When the game is non-continuation, an effect pattern in which the teammate character is inferior with high probability may be selected, and the subsequent result may be suggested in advance.

(Volume graph in Fig. 92)
Next, description will be made using the volume graph of FIG. FIG. 92 is a graph showing the relationship between sound output time and sound volume when outputting music. In FIG. 92, the numerical value indicated on the vertical axis represents the volume, and the unit is represented by “dB (decibel)”. Further, the smaller the negative value, the larger the volume value, and the larger the up / down swing width with reference to “∞”, the larger the volume value. The graph shown in FIG. 92A shows, for example, sound output from the upper left speaker 40 and the upper right speaker 42, and the graph shown in FIG. 92B shows, for example, the lower left speaker 41. The sound emitted from the lower right speaker 43 is shown. That is, it shows that one piece of music is output at the same timing just by different speakers, and a waveform in which so-called stereo sound is output is shown.

  First, after the music is output, the sound is output at the same volume until the timing (B). At timing (B), the sound output of the music is silenced until timing (C) is reached. That is, no music is output from timing (B) to timing (C). Since the sound is muted for a short time, the player can listen to the sound as if it was interrupted for a moment. In addition, the reverberation effect (delay processing) is applied to the music at the timing when the timing (A) is reached, and the reverberation effect gradually appears after the timing (B).

  Next, from timing (C) to timing (D), the sound is output again at the same volume, and the volume is reduced during a part of the period.

  Next, between the timing (D) and the timing (E), the sound output of the music is silenced again. Therefore, the sound is interrupted and listened to by the player together with the mute from timing (B) to timing (C). If such a muffle period is provided, the sound reverberation effect can be made clearer than when no mute period is provided, and a clear reverberation effect sound can be output to the player. Can do.

  Next, from timing (E) to timing (F), the sound is output again at the same volume, and the volume is reduced during a part of the period.

  Next, between the timing (F) and the timing (G), the sound output of the music is set to mute again. Therefore, the sound is interrupted and listened to by the player together with the silencing from timing (B) to timing (C) and the silencing from timing (D) to timing (E).

  Next, at the timing (G), the volume is configured to be smaller than the volume when the sound is output until the timing (G). Note that the volume that is output after reaching the timing (G) is configured to be smaller than the volume that is output until the timing (G), even if the volume is the highest. Therefore, the music is gradually interrupted after reaching timing (B), and the volume of the music is gradually reduced after reaching timing (G).

  Next, during the period from the timing (G) to the timing (H), the sound is output so as to finely increase or decrease the volume. Note that, as described above, the maximum volume between the timing (G) and the timing (H) is configured to be smaller than the volume that was output until the timing (G).

  Next, between the timing (H) and the timing (I), the sound output of the music is again silenced. Therefore, the sound is interrupted together with the silencing from timing (B) to timing (C), the silencing from timing (D) to timing (E), and the silencing from timing (F) to timing (G). By adjusting the volume from timing (G) to timing (H), the music is gradually reduced.

  Next, at the timing (I), the volume is configured to be smaller than the volume that was output from the timing (G) to the timing (H). In both FIG. 92 (a) and FIG. 92 (b), the sound output after reaching the timing (I) is from the timing (G) to the timing (H). The volume is smaller than the volume that was emitted during the period. Therefore, after reaching the timing (B), the sound is gradually interrupted, and the volume gradually decreases as the timing (G) and the timing (I) are reached. .

  Next, during the period from the timing (I) to the timing (J), the sound is output so as to finely increase or decrease the volume. As described above, in both FIG. 92 (a) and FIG. 92 (b), the maximum volume between timing (I) and timing (J) is between timing (G) and timing (H). It is configured to be smaller than the sound volume that was emitted at.

  Next, between the timing (J) and the timing (K), the sound output of the music is again silenced. Therefore, mute from timing (B) to timing (C), mute from timing (D) to timing (E), mute from timing (F) to timing (G), and from timing (H) to timing (I) The sound volume is gradually reduced by adjusting the volume from timing (G) to timing (H) and adjusting the volume from timing (I) to timing (J) while the sound is interrupted along with the mute. It is configured.

  Next, at the timing (K), the volume is set to be smaller than the volume of the sound output from the timing (I) to the timing (J). In both FIG. 92 (a) and FIG. 92 (b), the sound output after reaching the timing (K) is from the timing (I) to the timing (J). The volume is smaller than the volume that was emitted during the period. Therefore, after reaching the timing (B), the sound gradually becomes discontinuous, and the volume gradually decreases as the timing (G), the timing (I), and the timing (K) are reached. It is configured.

  Next, during the period from the timing (K) to the timing (L), the sound is output so that the volume is finely increased or decreased. As described above, in both FIG. 92 (a) and FIG. 92 (b), the maximum volume between timing (K) and timing (L) is between timing (I) and timing (J). It is configured to be smaller than the sound volume that was emitted at.

  Next, at the timing (L), the sound output of the music is silenced again, and after reaching the timing (L), the sound output of the music is silenced for a predetermined period. It should be noted that the silencing time after reaching timing (L) is from timing (B) to timing (C), from timing (D) to timing (E), and timing (F ) To timing (G), from timing (H) to timing (I), and from timing (J) to timing (K).

  92A is assigned to the upper left speaker 40 and the upper right speaker 42, and the sound output shown in FIG. 92B is supplied to the lower left speaker 41 and the lower right speaker 43. It can be considered to carry. That is, in both FIG. 92 (a) and FIG. 92 (b), although the sound is gradually interrupted and the sound volume is reduced, the sound volume is higher than that in FIG. 92 (a). It is shown that 92 (b) is set larger. As described above, by setting the volume output from the lower left speaker 41 and the lower right speaker 43 to be larger than that of the upper left speaker 40 and the upper right speaker 42, for example, suppose that a medal is paid out to the tray unit 38. In addition, it is possible to prevent the sound output from the lower left speaker 41 and the lower right speaker 43 from being erased by the sound of paying out medals.

(Timing chart 7 in FIG. 93)
Next, description will be made with reference to the timing chart 7 of FIG. Note that “music A”, “success sound”, “BET sound”, “reel rotation start sound”, “stop sound”, “payout sound”, and “sound prompting the operation of the effect button” in FIG. Since it is the same as the content described in the description of FIG. 88, the description is omitted. Further, the process until the payout sound is turned on is the same as that shown in FIG. Note that “delay” indicates a process for giving a reverberation effect to music. When “delay” is ON, the sound is gradually interrupted and the volume is gradually decreased. Configured as follows. For example, in FIG. 92, the “delay” is ON from the timing (A) to the timing (L). On the other hand, when the “delay” is OFF, the music is output at a constant volume. For example, the “delay” is OFF until the timing (A) in FIG. 92 is reached. “Vol” indicates a volume. When the volume is “0”, no sound is output. When the volume is “100”, It shows a state where the sound is emitted at the maximum value. For convenience, only the maximum value is set to “100”, so the value of the maximum value can be arbitrarily changed, and any value can be set between “0” and “100”. It is like that.

  At timing (L), the delay is turned ON. That is, after the payout is performed, the sound being output is interrupted, and the volume is gradually reduced. Note that the timing (L) in FIG. 93 corresponds to the timing (A) in FIG.

  In addition, after the timing (L) when the delay is turned on, the volume is decreased from “100” to “0” and then increased again to “100” twice, as indicated by “Vol”, It is lowered from “100” to “0”, raised to about “80”, and lowered to “0” again. Thereafter, it is raised to about “50” and lowered to “0” again. Thereafter, it is raised to about “30”, lowered to “0” again, and thereafter remains “0”. Therefore, the player can hear that the sound is interrupted and the volume gradually decreases. Note that timing (L) to timing (O) in FIG. 93 corresponds to timing (A) to timing (L) in FIG.

  Next, at timing (M), a sound is generated to prompt the user to operate the effect button (effect button 21). The voice prompting the operation of the effect button is, for example, a voice such as “Press!”. Then, after the sound for prompting the operation of the effect button is output, at the timing (N), the sound for prompting the operation of the effect button is muted. That is, the sound prompting the operation of the effect button is immediately muted after the notification for prompting the operation of the effect button is performed.

  Although not shown, at the timing (M), the effect button 21 changes from the operation non-acceptance state to the operation acceptance state. When in this operation acceptance state, the operation of the effect button 21 is accepted. When the effect button 21 is operated while in this operation acceptance state, in the example of FIG. 93, the lottery result (winning) to be shifted to a state advantageous to the player (for example, the ART state) is obtained. It has come to inform. The operation acceptance state is configured from a predetermined time, and the operation acceptance state corresponds to the operation valid period in the present invention.

  Then, at timing (O), a success sound is output to notify that the player is in a state advantageous for the player (for example, ART state). Then, the sound output of the music A is turned off, and the delay is also turned off. Then, at the timing (P), the success sound is silenced.

  In the case of winning, since the state shifts from the chance zone to, for example, the ART state, the music A that is turned on in the chance zone is turned off. The second period in the present invention corresponds to the period from the timing (L) to the timing (O) in FIG. Further, the first period in the present invention corresponds to the period from timing (A) to timing (L) in FIG. Note that the first period may be from timing (A) in FIG. 93 to timing (J) when the third stop operation is completed. Note that the timing (timing (M)) for turning on the voice prompting the operation of the effect button may be set at the timing (O) when “Vol” becomes “0” or after the timing (O). . In this case, after elapse of a predetermined time from the mute state, for example, a sound such as “Press!” Is output, and it becomes easier to listen to a notification that prompts the user to operate the effect button.

(Timing chart 8 in FIG. 94)
Next, description will be made with reference to the timing chart 8 of FIG. FIG. 94 is another example of FIG. Note that “Song A” in FIG. 94 is the same as the contents described in the description of FIGS. Further, “in game” indicates a state in which a player is playing a game. For example, timing (A) to timing (O) in FIG. 93 correspond to the game in FIG. On the other hand, “not playing” indicates a state in which no game is played by the player. For example, the timing until the timing (A) in FIG. 93 or after the timing (O) is shown in FIG. Applicable during non-games. In FIG. 94, “song A” is configured to perform a delay process (a process for applying a reverberation effect to sound). In the delay processing, the data of “Song A” itself may be processed, or sound data subjected to delay processing may be stored in advance.

  First, in FIG. 94A, when a game is started by the player at timing (A), a song based on the song A is output. Then, at timing (B), a delay process (a process for applying a reverberation effect to the sound) is performed on the song “Song A”. Then, from the timing (B) to the timing (C), the music subjected to the delay process is output.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 94 (b), when the game is started by the player at the timing (A), a song based on the song A is output. Then, at timing (B), a delay process (a process for applying a reverberation effect to the sound) is performed on the song “Song A”. Then, from the timing (B) to the timing (C), the music subjected to the delay process is output. In FIG. 94 (b), the game time required for one game is longer than in the example shown in FIG. 94 (a). That is, in the example shown in FIG. 94 (b), a player who is playing a game is assumed to be a player who is not familiar with the game, which takes time to stop the symbol. In this way, when a player who is not familiar with the game is playing a game, using the delay SE, which is dedicated sound data that has been subjected only to the delay process from the timing (C) to the timing (D), The reverberation effect is applied to the sound. The delay SE can be looped. With such a configuration, even if a player who is not used to a game takes time to play the game, the sound reverberation effect is not interrupted, and a reduction in the effect can be prevented. The delay SE is stored in the sound source ROM 606 as dedicated sound data.

(Timing chart 9 in FIG. 95)
Next, description will be made with reference to the timing chart 9 of FIG. Note that “Song A” in FIG. 95 is the same as the contents described in the description of FIGS. Of the “states managed by the sub control board”, the “Bonus preparation state” is the state indicated by the number “05” in FIG. 22, and the “first Bonus state” is the number “ The “third bonus state” is a state indicated by the number “08” in FIG.

  In FIG. 95 (a), the music A to be played back in the “first Bonus state” and the elements constituting the music A, “rust”, “interlude”, and “A melody” are shown. . In FIG. 95 (b), the music A to be played back in the “third Bonus state” and the elements constituting the music A are “prelude”, “A melody”, “B melody”, “rust”, “Interlude” is shown. In FIG. 95 (a), the music piece A is reproduced in the order of “Cho”, “Interlude”, and “A melody”. In FIG. 95 (b), the music piece A is reproduced in the order of “prelude”, “A melody”, “B melody”, “rust”, and “interlude”. When all the elements constituting the musical piece A are reproduced, if they are still in the “Bonus state”, they may be reproduced from the head again (may be looped). In FIG. 95 (a), only the rust portion may be repeatedly reproduced. Note that the music A that is played back in the “first bonus state” and the music A that is played back in the “third bonus state” are composed of the same music. In the “first bonus state”, the “third bonus state” Is configured to play a part of the music piece A. The “prelude” portion in FIG. 95 (b) constitutes the normal playback portion that is the first timing in the present invention, and the “rust” portion in FIGS. 95 (a) and 95 (b). Constitutes a specific reproduction part which is the second timing in the present invention.

  As described above, since the “first bonus state” is composed of 30 games and the “third bonus state” is composed of 50 games, the rise period of the “bonus state” (game) The “possible period) is configured so that the“ third Bonus state ”is longer than the“ first Bonus state ”. In the present invention, the “first bonus state” constitutes a first privilege game advantageous to the player, and the “third bonus state” represents a second privilege game more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. Configure.

(First Bonus state)
First, in FIG. 95 (a), at the timing when the state transitions from the “Bonus preparation state” to the “first Bonus state”, the rust portion of the music piece A is output. Then, when the reproduction of the chorus part is finished, the interlude part of the music piece A is output, and when the reproduction of the interlude part of the music piece A is finished, the A melody part of the music piece A is outputted. Then, when the “first bonus state” ends (the game of 30 games ends), the music A is muted.

(3rd Bonus state)
Next, in FIG. 95 (b), the prelude part of the music piece A is output at the timing when the state transitions from the “Bonus preparation state” to the “third Bonus state”. When playback of the prelude part is completed, the A melody part is output. When playback of the A melody part ends, the B melody part is output. When playback of the B melody part ends, the rust part is output. When playback of the chorus part ends, the interlude part is output. Then, when the “third bonus state” ends (the game of 50 games ends), the music A is muted.

  If the first bonus state is digested at 4.1 seconds per game, 123 seconds (4.1 seconds × 30 games) are required from the start to the end of the first bonus state. Similarly, when the third bonus state is digested at 4.1 seconds per game, 205 seconds (4.1 seconds × 50 games) are required from the start to the end of the third bonus state. Note that the “rust” of the music A is provided at a position where the music A has been played for 140 seconds from the start (“prelude”). For this reason, when the first Bonus state is digested during the game digestion time, “rust” cannot be heard, and when the third Bonus state is digested during the game digestion time, “rust” can be heard. From such a relationship, in the first Bonus state, “rust” is reproduced from the start of the first Bonus state. With this configuration, even a player who plays a game during the game digestion time as described above can listen to the “rust” of the music.

  In other words, a Bonus game with a small number of Bonus game playable games, such as the first Bonus state, is played from the middle of the music, and a Bonus game with many Bonus game playable games, such as the third Bonus state, is the top of the music Therefore, even in the “first bonus state” where there are few games that can be played, it is possible to listen to the rust portion that constitutes the most exciting part of the music, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in the gaming interest it can.

  A big bonus can be applied as the second privilege game, and a regular bonus can be applied as the first privilege game. Also, an ART state with a short initial game number can be applied as the first privilege game, and an ART state with a long initial game number can be applied as the second privilege game.

  In FIG. 95, a pachislot machine has been described as an example, but may be applied to a pachinko machine. In addition, when applied to a pachinko machine, for example, a jackpot with a small number of round games (for example, a five-round jackpot) is applied as the first bonus game, and a jackpot with a large number of round games (for example, a jackpot with a large number of round games, for example) , 16 rounds jackpot). In this case, it is possible to play from the chorus part when the big hit is 5 rounds and to play from the prelude part when the big hit is 16 rounds. If comprised in this way, the effect similar to the effect in the said pachislot will be acquired.

(Relationship between payout time and payout sound)
Next, the relationship between the payout time and the payout sound will be described using the timing chart 10 of FIG. In FIG. 96, as an example, when the winning number “32” “push order bell A1” is won and the symbol combination constituting “push order bell A1” is stopped on the active line (the number of payouts) Will be described on the basis of the example of 9 payout).

  When paying out, the medal is paid out at different payout times as the payout time for paying out per medal depending on whether the credit is stored or when the payout unit 38 is paid out. Has been.

(Credit signal)
The credit signal described in FIG. 96 indicates the payout time when the credit is stored. This credit signal is configured to be paid out with a payout time of 100 ms per medal. In FIG. 96, the credit signal is turned ON nine times in order to pay out nine cards. Further, the interval between payouts is, for example, 20 ms. That is, the time required for payout when storing 9 payouts in credit is 100 ms × 9 (sheets) and 20 ms × 8 (interval count), which is a total of 1060 ms.

(Discharge command signal)
The payout command signal shown in FIG. 96 indicates the payout time when paying out to the tray unit 38. The payout command signal is configured to pay out with a payout time of 77 ms per medal. In FIG. 96, the payout command signal is turned ON nine times in order to pay out nine sheets. Further, the interval between payouts is, for example, 20 ms. That is, the time required for payout when 9 payouts are stored in credits is 77 ms × 9 (sheets) and 20 ms × 8 (interval number), which is a total of 853 ms.

(Payout sound)
The payout sound described in FIG. 96 is a payout sound used for both payout when storing in credit and payout when paying out to the tray unit 38. In both payout and payout, a payout sound composed of a sound output time of 1700 ms is output (FIG. 106 described later). That is, the sound output time of the payout sound is configured to be longer than the payout time when the credit is stored (the above-mentioned 1060 ms), and is longer than the payout time when the payout unit 38 is paid out (the above-mentioned 853 ms). Composed of a long time. In the example of FIG. 96, it is assumed that nine paying combinations are won and stopped on the active line. However, for example, a single paying combination is won and a single paying combination is configured on the active line. Even when the combination of symbols to be displayed is stopped, a payout sound composed of 1700 ms may be output, or a sound output time (for example, 200 ms) slightly longer than the time required for paying out a single sheet is configured. You may make it emit the payout sound which was made.

  In other words, a payout sound composed of a longer time than the time required for each payout is produced regardless of whether the payout is to be stored in credit or the payout to the tray unit 38. Thus, it is possible to give the player a feeling that more game media are being paid out than the actual payout number, and the game can be further improved.

  In this embodiment, like the chance item CN1 of the winning number “29”, the payout sound constituted by a time longer than the time required for paying out when the winning combination is small (the number of payouts is 1). Can be output to the player to notice that a payout has been made.

  If the payout sound is the same winning combination, a payout sound composed of the same payout time may be generated regardless of the gaming state. For example, in a gaming state that is disadvantageous for the player (for example, the first RT gaming state), when the common bell of the winning number “31” is won, and in a gaming state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the fourth RT gaming state) In both cases, a payout sound composed of 1700 ms may be emitted when the common bell of the winning number “31” is won.

  When a payout is made across the upper limit (50 sheets) of the number of storages (for example, when the number of storages is 45 and a winning combination of 9 sheets is won), up to the upper limit of the number of storages, the medal 1 The payout time may be configured to be paid out with a payout time of 100 ms, and the payout time of 77 ms may be paid out per medal after exceeding the upper limit value of the number of storage.

  When a payout is made across the upper limit (50 sheets) of the number of storages (for example, when the number of storages is 45 and a winning combination of 9 sheets is won), up to the upper limit of the number of storages, the medal 1 The payout time may be 100 ms, and the payout time may be 100 ms for each medal even after the upper limit of the number of storage is exceeded.

  It should be noted that, when medals are stored in the game medium storage means, the medals are paid out to the tray unit 38 when the game medium adjustment means (the adjustment button 9) is operated by the player. In this case, each medal is configured to be paid out with a payout time of 77 ms (based on the payout time paid out to the tray unit 38), and the payout sound is configured with a time equal to the time required for payout. A payout sound is output. For example, when 10 game media are stored, the time required for payout when the checkout button 9 is operated by a player is 77 ms × 10 (sheets), and the interval between payouts is 20 ms × 9 ( The total number of intervals is 950 ms. As a payout sound at this time, a payout sound that continues to be output for 950 ms is output. Note that the payout sound may be stored in advance in the sound source ROM 606 as a payout sound having a time equal to the payout time corresponding to each of 1 to 50 sheets that can be stored. By configuring as described above, when the settlement button 9 is operated to end the game, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the payout of the settlement number or more has been performed.

  Note that the payout sound may store data corresponding to the payout sound constituted by 1700 ms, and the data may be output once at the time of payout. For example, the payout sound is constituted by 170 ms. Data corresponding to the payout sound may be stored and the data may be output 10 times. Alternatively, a payout sound composed of 170 ms may be played back in a loop.

  The payout sound is configured as shown in FIG. 106, for example. FIG. 106 (a) shows a waveform of a bell combination payout sound won in the RT1 gaming state (for example, in the normal gaming state), and FIG. 106 (b) shows in the RT4 gaming state ( For example, a waveform of a payout sound of a bell role (including a pushing order bell) won in the ART state) is shown. The vertical axis indicates the volume, and the horizontal axis indicates the sound output time. The sound output time is composed of 1700 ms, and (a) in the RT1 gaming state (for example, in the normal gaming state) in FIG. 106, rather than in the RT4 gaming state (for example, in the ART state) in FIG. 106 (b). ), The sound output time of the sound with the reverberation effect is configured to be longer. In this way, even for a bell combination composed of the same number of payouts, it is possible to give a sense that different combinations have won a prize by outputting different payout sounds depending on the state. Note that the payout sound shown in FIG. 106 (a) may be emitted in the RT4 gaming state (for example, in the ART state), and the payout sound shown in FIG. 106 (b) may be generated in the RT1 gaming state (for example, in the ART state). Sound may be output during normal gaming.

(Timing chart 11 in FIG. 97)
Next, based on the timing chart 11 of FIG. 97, the volume control when an error occurs during the production of the production sound will be described.

  The “error sound” shown in FIG. 97 is a sound for notifying the occurrence of a predetermined error, indicating that it is output as data when ON, and not output as data when OFF. Is shown. Further, “Song A” is a sound such as a predetermined BGM for production as described above, and indicates whether or not to output. Furthermore, “Vol” indicates a volume for outputting sounds such as “error sound” and “music A”.

  As shown in FIG. 97, when a normal error is not detected, a production sound such as “Song A” is output at a predetermined volume level, for example, “50”. This volume level is determined by an initial value determined in advance by the gaming machine 1, a level set by the player, a value set in audio data such as “Song A” to be output, or the like. In the present embodiment, the volume level “100” indicates the maximum volume that the gaming machine 1 can output. Further, the volume level “50” and the volume level “0” are the volume levels according to the ratio to the volume level “100”.

  Next, when a predetermined error is detected at timing (A), the output of “Song A” being output is muted, and an “error sound” corresponding to the error is read and output. Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 mutes the output sound of “Song A” when an error is input via the sub-control board 400. More specifically, the mute is applied to the channel outputting “Song A” of each speaker (upper left speaker 40, lower left speaker 41, upper right speaker 42, lower right speaker 43).

  The sound source IC 605 reads the corresponding “error sound” from the sound source ROM 606 and outputs it to the speakers (the upper left speaker 40, the lower left speaker 41, the upper right speaker 42, and the lower right speaker 43) via the amplifier board 500. To do. At this time, the sound source IC 605 sets the volume level to “100” at the maximum in response to the error detection, and outputs it. The volume level at this time is “100” regardless of the volume level setting. Therefore, when an error is detected, an “error sound” is output at the maximum volume of the gaming machine 1.

  Next, when the detection of the error is eliminated at timing (B), the output of “error sound” is stopped and the output of “music A” is restored. At this time, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 returns the volume level from the maximum “100” to the original volume level “50” and outputs “Song A” with the cancellation of the error.

(Channel management processing of LCD control CPU)
Next, channel management processing of each speaker (upper left speaker 40, lower left speaker 41, upper right speaker 42, lower right speaker 43) by the liquid crystal control CPU 601 will be described. The liquid crystal control CPU 601 generates a channel state management map in the liquid crystal control RAM 603 in order to manage the channel audio output of each speaker (upper left speaker 40, lower left speaker 41, upper right speaker 42, lower right speaker 43). ing.

(Channel status management map for LCD control CPU speakers)
FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a channel state management map generated by the liquid crystal control CPU 601 in the liquid crystal control RAM 603. As shown in FIG. 98, the channel state management map stores audio data being output for each of the fixed channels 00CH to 05CH and the variable channels 06CH to 39CH. Further, the channel state management map stores the priority of output of the audio data, the output order of the output, and the remaining reproduction time together with the audio data being output.

  In addition, “H”, “M”, and “L” in the priority order respectively indicate a high level, a middle level, and a low level, the priority order “H” has the highest priority order, and the next becomes the priority order “M”. , “L” indicates the lowest priority. Further, the remaining reproduction time stored in the channel state management map is subtracted by the interruption process of the liquid crystal control CPU 601. When the remaining playback time reaches “0”, the output of the audio data of the channel is terminated and deleted from the channel state management map.

  When the liquid crystal control CPU 601 that generates such a channel state management map receives the output designation command, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches for the channel (fixed channel) designated in the audio data designated by the output designation command and outputs the channel. Update the corresponding fixed channel area in the state management map. Note that the audio data designated by the output designation command, that is, the output of the system sound is output from a fixed channel designated in advance, regardless of the channel availability. Therefore, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 updates the channel state management map for the designated fixed channel as described above, regardless of the channel availability. The output designation command is input from the liquid crystal control CPU 601 to the sound source IC 605 or the like, and the sound source IC 605 reads out desired audio data from the sound source ROM 606 or the like according to the output designation command and outputs it from the speaker.

  Upon receiving the effect designation command, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines the effect output audio data based on the effect designation command as described above, and whether the corresponding audio data is stereo audio data or monaural audio data, Determine.

  When the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines that the corresponding audio data is stereo audio data, it refers to the channel state management map, and in order from the 06CH to the lower direction, two channels are consecutively designated as even channels from the even channels. Search for the channel that is.

  In the example of the channel state management map shown in FIG. 98, first, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches for 06CH. Since liquid crystal control CPU 601 stores data in 06CH and is in use, next, it searches for 08CH. Since the 08CH is empty, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 next searches for 09CH. However, since the 09CH stores data and is in use, it next searches for 10CH. Since 10CH is empty, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches for 11CH and confirms that 11CH is empty. Then, 10CH and 11CH are set as output target channels, and audio output processing is executed.

  On the other hand, if the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines that the corresponding audio data is not monaural audio data but monaural audio data, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 refers to the channel state management map and sequentially becomes an empty channel from 39CH upward. Search for available channels. Here, when the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches for an output channel for monaural audio data, there is a channel in which only one of the two consecutive channels from the even channel is used and the other is an empty channel. In this case, such an empty channel is preferentially searched as an empty channel. As a result, it is possible to leave as many as possible two consecutive empty channels from the even-numbered channels, and leave the empty channels for the subsequent output of stereo audio data.

  In the example of the channel state management map shown in FIG. 98, first, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches for empty channels in order from 39CH to the upper direction. The liquid crystal control CPU 601 stores data in 09CH and is in use, whereas 08CH is empty, so that 08CH is set as an output target channel, and audio output processing is executed.

Next, processing when there is no empty channel will be described.
If there is no empty channel, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 stops outputting predetermined audio data, and outputs new audio data using the channel that has output the audio data. Hereinafter, a description will be given of a method for searching audio data for stopping output. As described above, the system sound is output from the fixed channel designated in advance regardless of the channel availability, and the process when the liquid crystal control CPU 601 receives the output designation command is the process described above. It is the same. Accordingly, the following processing of the liquid crystal control CPU 601 will be described only in the case of receiving an effect designation command.

(Channel state management map explaining how to search for output stop audio data based on priority)
First, a method for searching for output stop voice data based on the priority order will be described.
FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a channel state management map for explaining the search for the output stop voice data based on the priority order.

  In FIG. 99, the data described at the top of the channel state management map indicates the contents of the audio data to be output this time. In addition, the reproduction time is stored in the audio data to be output. The same applies to FIGS. 100, 101, 102, and 105.

  When the audio data to be output is stereo audio data, the audio data to be stopped is also stereo audio data. When the audio data to be output is monaural audio data, the audio data to be stopped is monaural. Target audio data. Note that if the target data cannot be searched between the stereo audio data and the monaural audio data, different types of audio data may be the output stop target.

  When the liquid crystal control CPU 601 receives an effect designation command, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches for a channel of audio data whose output is to be stopped from the 06CH to 39CH according to the priority order. It should be noted that here, the audio data whose output is to be stopped is targeted to the audio data whose priority is lower than the output target audio data.

  Hereinafter, specific description will be given based on the audio data to be output and the example of the channel state management map shown in FIG.

  First, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 reads the priority order of the audio data to be output, and stores the priority order “M” in the liquid crystal control RAM 603. Accordingly, the priority order of the audio data whose output is to be stopped is the priority order “L” and the priority order “M” which are lower than the priority order “M”.

Next, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches a channel in which the priority level “L” having the lowest priority level is stored from the storage areas 06CH to 39CH of the channel state management map.
In the example of FIG. 99, since the data of priority “L” is only 14CH, 14CH is determined as the output stop channel.
If the audio data to be output is stereo audio data, the search is performed based on whether two consecutive channels from the even channels can be set as output stop channels, as in the case of searching for empty channels. You may go.

  The liquid crystal control CPU 601 selects a channel in which the priority order “M” is stored when the target channel whose output is to be stopped cannot be searched with the priority order “L” from the storage areas 06CH to 39CH of the channel state management map. In the same manner as the search with the priority “L”, search is performed to search for a target channel to stop output.

  Since the priority order of the audio data to be output is the priority order “M”, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 can search for the output stop target channel with the priority order “M” from the storage areas 06CH to 39CH of the channel state management map. If not, it is determined that there is no target channel to stop output.

Next, processing when a plurality of data having the same priority is searched will be described.
When a plurality of data having the same priority is searched, the following two methods will be described. That is, the first is the case where the remaining playback time is short and the output is to be stopped, and the second is the case where the audio data output start time is the oldest and the output is to be stopped. is there.

(Search for output stop audio data based on remaining playback time)
First, a case where output is to be stopped from audio data with a short remaining reproduction time will be described.
FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a channel state management map for explaining the search for output stop audio data based on the remaining reproduction time.

  When the liquid crystal control CPU 601 receives an effect designation command, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches for a channel of audio data whose output is to be stopped from the 06CH to 39CH according to the priority order. Here, when a plurality of data having the same priority is searched, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 sets output to be stopped from audio data having a short remaining reproduction time.

  Hereinafter, specific description will be given based on the audio data to be output and the example of the channel state management map shown in FIG.

  First, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches for a channel of audio data whose output is to be stopped based on the priority order. The channel search method for the output stop audio data based on the priority order is the same as the search method described above, and the description thereof is omitted.

  In the example of FIG. 100, when the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches for a channel of audio data whose output is to be stopped based on the priority order, 14CH and 15CH are used as output stop channel candidates as data of priority “L”. ,Extract.

  Further, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 compares the remaining reproduction times of the respective audio data, and extracts the channel having the shortest remaining reproduction time. Therefore, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 extracts 15 CH as the channel with the shortest remaining reproduction time, and determines 15 CH as the target channel for stopping output.

(Search output stop audio data based on playback start time)
Next, a case will be described in which output is started from the oldest reproduction start time in which audio data is output.
FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a channel state management map for explaining the search for output stop audio data based on the reproduction start time.

  When the liquid crystal control CPU 601 receives an effect designation command, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches for a channel of audio data whose output is to be stopped from the 06CH to 39CH according to the output order. Here, when a plurality of pieces of data having the same priority are searched, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 sets the output to be stopped from the audio data with the oldest reproduction start time.

  Hereinafter, specific description will be given based on the audio data to be output and the example of the channel state management map shown in FIG.

  First, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches for a channel of audio data whose output is to be stopped based on the priority order. The channel search method for the output stop audio data based on the priority order is the same as the search method described above, and the description thereof is omitted.

  In the example of FIG. 101, when the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches for a channel of audio data whose output is to be stopped based on the priority order, 14CH and 15CH are used as candidates for the output stop channel as data of the priority order “L”. ,Extract.

  Further, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 compares the output start times in order to compare the reproduction start times of the respective audio data, and extracts the channel having the oldest output order in which the output of the audio data is started. Therefore, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 extracts 14CH as the channel with the oldest reproduction start time, and determines 14CH as the channel whose output is to be stopped.

(Overwrite output playback of the same audio data)
Next, a case where the same audio data as the audio data being output is reproduced and output from the same channel will be described.
FIG. 102 is a diagram showing a channel state management map for explaining overwriting output of the same sound.

  The liquid crystal control CPU 601 receives the effect designation command, and determines whether or not the same audio data as the audio data output by the effect designation command is currently being output. If the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines that the same audio data as the audio data to be output is currently being output, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 stops outputting the output audio data and newly uses the same channel. Output the specified audio data.

  On the other hand, if the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines that the same audio data as the audio data to be output is not currently being output, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 uses the empty channel search method or the output stop channel designation method described above for output. The channel is searched, and newly designated audio data is output from the searched channel.

  The liquid crystal control CPU 601 outputs the audio data from the channel unique to the audio data when the designated audio data is audio data for fixed channel output and the output destination channel is fixed.

  Hereinafter, specific description will be given based on the audio data to be output and the example of the channel state management map shown in FIG.

  First, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines whether the audio data to be output is audio data for a fixed channel or audio data for a variable channel. If the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines that the audio data to be output is audio data for a fixed channel, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 outputs specified audio data from the corresponding fixed CH (00CH to 05CH). Note that the liquid crystal control CPU 601 stops the output of the audio data being used even if the corresponding fixed CH (00CH to 05CH) is in use, and newly outputs the audio data from the channel.

  On the other hand, if the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines that the audio data to be output is audio data for a variable channel, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches for the variable CH (06CH to 39CH) and outputs the same audio data as the specified audio data. It is determined whether or not it has been done. When the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines that the same audio data as the designated audio data is being output from any channel, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 stops outputting the audio data of the channel and newly designates the audio data ( (Same audio data) is output from the channel.

  In the example of FIG. 102, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches whether the audio data “ESE” that is designated audio data is output from any of 06CH to 39CH. The liquid crystal control CPU 601 recognizes that it is output from 14CH by this search, and stops output from 14CH. Next, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 outputs the designated audio data “ESE” from 14CH.

  On the other hand, if the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines that the audio data “ESE” is not output from any of the 06CH to 39CH, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 outputs the audio data by the already-described empty channel search method, output stop channel designation method, or the like. The designated audio data “ESE” is output from the searched channel.

(Timing chart 12 in FIG. 103)
Next, a case where the same audio data as that being output is reproduced and output from the same channel based on the timing chart will be described.
FIG. 103 shows a timing chart relating to overwriting output of the same sound.

  The “effect button SW” shown in FIG. 103 indicates whether or not the effect button 21 has been pressed. Specifically, “ON of the effect button SW” indicates a state in which the effect button sensor 710 s detects pressing of the effect button 21, and “OFF of the“ effect button SW ”indicates that the effect button sensor 710 s is the effect button 21. The state where the pressing of is not detected is shown.

  “CH writing” represents a preparation state in which audio data can be output from a speaker (upper left speaker 40, lower left speaker 41, upper right speaker 42, lower right speaker 43). Specifically, “CH write” ON indicates that voice data output is being prepared, and “CH write” OFF indicates that voice data output preparation has been completed or no output processing has been performed. Indicates the state.

  “Sound output” represents the output state of sound from the speakers (upper left speaker 40, lower left speaker 41, upper right speaker 42, lower right speaker 43). Indicates a state in which sound is output, and OFF of “sound output” indicates a state in which no sound is output. This “sound output” is used as the data output status of audio data from the effect control board 600 through the amplifier board 500 to the speakers (upper left speaker 40, lower left speaker 41, upper right speaker 42, lower right speaker 43). Also good.

  As shown in FIG. 103, at the timing (A), when the effect button sensor 710s detects pressing of the effect button 21, the “effect button SW” is turned ON.

  When the “effect button SW” is turned ON, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 turns “CH writing” ON at timing (B), and generates audio data corresponding to pressing of the effect button 21, for example, audio data “ESE”, as the sound source ROM 606. And preparation for outputting to the speakers (the upper left speaker 40, the lower left speaker 41, the upper right speaker 42, and the lower right speaker 43) via the amplifier board 500 is started. Note that the liquid crystal control CPU 601 outputs the audio data “ESE” from 14CH.

  Next, when the output preparation of the audio data “ESE” is completed, at timing (C), the sound based on the audio data “ESE” is output from the speakers (the upper left speaker 40, the lower left speaker 41, the upper right speaker 42, the lower right speaker). Output from the speaker 43). As a result, the “sound output” is turned from OFF to ON.

  Next, when the effect button sensor 710s detects that the effect button 21 is pressed while the sound based on the audio data “ESE” is being output at the timing (D), the “effect button SW” is turned ON.

  When the “effect button SW” is turned on, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 sets “CH writing” to ON at timing (E), and outputs the audio data corresponding to the depression of the effect button 21 and the same audio data “ESE” as described above. Preparations for reading from the sound source ROM 606 and outputting to the speakers (the upper left speaker 40, the lower left speaker 41, the upper right speaker 42, and the lower right speaker 43) via the amplifier board 500 are started. The liquid crystal control CPU 601 stops the output from the 14CH that outputs the same audio data “ESE” as the audio data “ESE” to be output this time. Thereby, the “sound output” is changed from ON to OFF. Also, new audio data “ESE” corresponding to pressing of the effect button 21 at the timing (D) is output from 14CH.

Next, when the output preparation of the new audio data “ESE” is completed, at timing (F), the sound based on the audio data “ESE” is output from the speakers (the upper left speaker 40, the lower left speaker 41, the upper right speaker 42, It is output from the lower right speaker 43). Thereby, the state of “sound output” is changed from OFF to ON again.
As described above, the same sound is continuously output using the same channel.

(Timing chart 13 in FIG. 104)
Next, the notification mode in the present invention will be described using the timing chart of FIG. Note that “liquid crystal display” in FIG. 104 indicates a liquid crystal display in the liquid crystal display device 46, and indicates a state in which the liquid crystal display device 46 is displaying if the liquid crystal display is ON. If the liquid crystal display is OFF, the liquid crystal display device 46 is not displaying. The “liquid crystal return state” refers to a state in which a return process is performed by the liquid crystal control CPU 601 when power is supplied and notification (for example, notification of an operation order) is possible in the liquid crystal display device 46. Show. If the liquid crystal return state is ON, it indicates that the notification in the liquid crystal display device 46 is not possible, and if the liquid crystal return state is OFF, it indicates that the notification in the liquid crystal display device 46 is possible. Yes. That is, when the power is supplied from the power supply substrate 200, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 causes the liquid crystal display device 46 to transition from the notification disabled state to the notification enabled state after undergoing a return process. In addition, “liquid crystal notification” indicates that notification is being performed based on the display contents on the liquid crystal display device 46. For example, in the ART state, when the winning order bell A1 of the winning number “32” is won, a notification image that prompts the user to operate the middle stop button 12 first is displayed. That is, if the liquid crystal notification is ON, for example, it indicates that the operation order of the push order bell role is being performed, and if the liquid crystal notification is OFF, for example, the notification of the operation order of the push order bell role is performed. Indicates that it has not been done. The “lamp return state” refers to a state in which when the power is supplied, the sub CPU 401 performs the return process, and the stop button operation display unit 35 can be notified (for example, notification of the operation order). Is shown. If the lamp return state is ON, it indicates that the notification on the stop button operation display unit 35 is disabled. If the lamp return state is OFF, the notification on the stop button operation display unit 35 is possible. It is shown that. That is, when power is supplied from the power supply board 200, the sub CPU 401 causes the stop button operation display unit 35 to transition from the notification disabled state to the notification enabled state after undergoing a return process. “Lamp notification” indicates that notification is being performed in the light emission mode of the stop button operation display unit 35. For example, in the ART state, when the push order bell A1 of the winning number “32” is won, the middle stop button operation display unit 35C is caused to emit light first so that the middle stop button 12 is operated first. That is, if the lamp notification is ON, for example, it indicates that the operation order of the push order bell combination is being performed, and if the lamp notification is OFF, for example, the notification of the operation order of the push order bell combination is performed. Indicates that it has not been done. In FIG. 104, it is assumed that the gaming state managed by the main control board 300 is the RT4 gaming state and the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the ART state.

  First, at the timing (A), the liquid crystal is notified on condition that the liquid crystal display is ON and the liquid crystal return state is OFF. In addition, notification by the lamp is performed on the condition that the lamp return state is OFF. Therefore, for example, in the ART state, when the pressing order bell A1 of the winning number “32” is won, a notification that the middle stop button 12 is operated first is sent to the liquid crystal display device 46 and the stop button operation display unit 35. Will be performed.

  Next, at timing (B), the power supply becomes a predetermined value or less due to a power failure or the like, and all of the liquid crystal display, liquid crystal notification, and lamp notification are OFF. In the example of FIG. 104, it is assumed that in the ART state, the pressing order bell A1 with the winning number “32” is won, and the timing (B) is reached in a state where no stop button is pressed. Suppose.

  Next, at timing (C), when the power is supplied again, the liquid crystal display is turned on, the liquid crystal return state is turned on, and the liquid crystal return process is started. Further, the lamp return state is turned ON, and the lamp return process is started.

  Next, at the timing (D), the lamp return state is turned off and the lamp notification is turned on. At the timing (D), the liquid crystal return state continues to be ON, and the liquid crystal display device 46 displays, for example, “returning”.

  Next, at the timing (E), the liquid crystal return state is turned off and the liquid crystal notification is turned on. That is, the period required from when the power is supplied to when the notification is possible on the liquid crystal display device 46 is from the timing (C) to the timing (E), and after the power is supplied, the stop button operation display unit 35. The period required until the notification becomes possible is between timing (C) and timing (D). Therefore, it is earlier in the stop button operation display unit 35 than in the liquid crystal display device 46 that the notification can be made after the power is supplied. In addition, as a factor from which the time until the notification of the liquid crystal display device 46 and the stop button operation display unit 35 becomes possible is different (a) Each return processing time itself is different. Although it is the same time, the time until the player can confirm the notification status is different.

  Then, at timing (C), the winning combination information storage means obtains information on the winning order A1 of the winning number “32”, and the stop button operation display unit 35 is used at timing (D). Then, the notification of the operation order of the push order bell A1 of the winning number “32” is started.

  Therefore, for example, when the power is turned off under the situation where the winning order number A32 of the winning number “32” is won, when the power is supplied again, the liquid crystal display device 46 is not waited for the return. Since the stop button operation display unit 35 that can be notified first is used to start the notification of the operation order of the push order bell A1 of the winning number “32”, the player stops the stop button operation display unit 35. If the stop button is operated in accordance with the operation order notified by, the correct bell symbol combination related to the pressing order bell A1 of the winning number “32” can be stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest without causing trouble to a player who wants to advance the game quickly.

  At timing (B), the power monitoring means for determining whether or not the power supply has become a predetermined value or less may be assigned to each of the main control board 300 and the sub control board 400, or the power board 200 may In this case, when the power supply becomes a predetermined value or less, a power-off signal may be transmitted to the main control board 300 and the sub control board.

  In addition, said structure can also be comprised as follows. In the above configuration, the sub control board 400 controls the stop button operation display unit 35, and the effect control board 600 controls the liquid crystal display device 46. However, the main control board 300 includes The stop button operation display unit 35 may be connected to control the stop button operation display unit 35 on the main control board 300. Even in such a case, when the power is supplied, the stop button operation display unit 35 controlled by the main control board 300 notifies the time until the liquid crystal display device 46 controlled by the effect control board 600 can be notified. By configuring a short time until it becomes possible and using the stop button operation display unit 35 controlled by the main control board 300 that can be informed earlier, the operation order of the push order bell is informed, Can also be made to progress. In the case of such a configuration, it is assumed that the ART state is managed by the main control board 300, and the operation order related to the push order bell is managed by the main control board 300.

Next, a description will be given of processing in the case of outputting audio data by stopping the output of predetermined audio data and outputting new audio data regardless of the priority order of the audio data to be output.
If there is an empty channel, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 uses the empty channel to output new audio data. If there is no empty channel, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 stops according to the priority order of the audio data being output. Audio data is determined, and new audio data is output using the channel from which the audio data was output.

  When the liquid crystal control CPU 601 receives an effect designation command, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches for a channel of audio data whose output is to be stopped from the 06CH to 39CH according to the priority order.

In addition, when the audio data having the same priority is searched, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines the audio data whose output is to be stopped according to the remaining reproduction time of the audio data, the output order, etc., as in the above search method. Search for a channel.
In the following, a process for searching for a channel of audio data to stop outputting according to the remaining reproduction time of audio data when audio data having the same priority is searched will be described.

(Search method for output stop audio data based only on priority of audio data being output)
FIG. 105 is a diagram showing a channel state management map for explaining a search method for output stopped audio data based only on the priority of audio data being output regardless of the priority of audio data to be output.

  First, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches for a channel in which audio data having a low priority is stored from the storage areas 06CH to 39CH of the channel state management map. Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches for the channel storing the priority “L” having the lowest priority from the storage areas 06CH to 39CH of the channel state management map. In the example of FIG. 105, since the data of the priority “L” is not stored, the process proceeds to the search for the next priority.

  Next, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches the channel in which the priority “M” having the next lowest priority is stored from the storage areas 06CH to 39CH of the channel state management map. In the example of FIG. 105, the priority order “M” data is from 06CH to 14CH, but since the output target audio data is monaural audio data, 10CH, 11CH, and 14CH, which are monaural audio data, are output. Extract as a stop channel candidate.

  Further, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 compares the remaining reproduction times of the respective audio data, and extracts the channel having the shortest remaining reproduction time. Therefore, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 extracts 14CH as the channel with the shortest remaining reproduction time, and determines 14CH as the channel whose output is to be stopped.

  Through the above processing, the output stop target channel is determined, the output of audio data output from the determined channel is stopped, and new audio data designated from the channel can be output.

(Second Embodiment)
Next, the output control for the lamp and the like performed in the same manner as the audio output control will be described. The output control of lamps includes control of various lamps such as lighting, extinguishing and blinking, and various LED lighting, extinguishing and blinking, as well as control of various driving devices such as a motor of a production device. Shall be. Hereinafter, unless otherwise specified, it is simply referred to as lamp output control.

  In the present embodiment, a specific detection result is obtained for a system sound that is output as a sound when a specific detection result is obtained by detecting an error or detecting an operation related to a game such as a lever operation. The lamps that are turned on, blinking, or turned off when called are called system lamps. In the output designation command for each control for a specific detection result, the voice output control command is called a voice output designation command, and the lamp output control command is called a system lamp command.

First, the structure of the gaming machine in this embodiment will be described.
In the present embodiment, differences from the gaming machine 1 in the first embodiment will be mainly described, the same components will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and the same configurations and controls will be described. Is omitted.

  FIG. 107 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration diagram of a main part of a gaming machine for describing lamp output control and audio output control in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 107, the gaming machine in the present embodiment includes a main control board 300, a sub control board 400a, a backlight relay board 450, an amplifier board 500, an effect control board 600a, and an effect device drive board. 650, a panel LED relay board 700a, an effect device drive relay board 750, and an effect button relay board 900.

(Main control board 300)
The main control board 300 is the same as the main control board 300 in the first embodiment. The main control board 300 is connected to a sub control board 400a instead of the sub control board 400 in the first embodiment.

(Sub-control board 400a)
The sub control board 400a is connected to the effect control board 600a and is connected to the effect button relay board 900. Therefore, the sub control board 400a is not directly connected to the panel LED relay board 700a, and transmits a command or the like to the panel LED relay board 700a via the effect control board 600a. The configuration of the sub control board 400a is the same as that of the sub control board 400 in the first embodiment.

Further, when the sub CPU 401 receives a command indicating a specific detection result from the main control board 300, the sub CPU 401 transmits an audio output designation command and a system lamp command corresponding to the specific detection result to the effect control board 600a. For example, when receiving a “lever reception command” from the main control board 300, the sub CPU 401 transmits an audio output designation command for outputting a sound at the time of lever reception to the liquid crystal control CPU 601 of the effect control board 600a. Then, a system lamp command for lighting the lamp at the time of lever reception is transmitted to the lamp CPU 608 of the effect control board 600a.
In the present embodiment, the transmission is performed as described above. However, the sub CPU 401 may directly transmit the audio output designation command to the sound source IC 605 of the effect control board 600a, or output the audio. Both the designation command and the system lamp command may be transmitted to the liquid crystal control CPU 601 of the effect control board 600a.

  In addition, when the sub-control board 400a determines a predetermined effect, the sub-control board 400a transmits an effect designation command (including a lamp effect, a sound effect, etc.) based on the effect contents to the effect control board 600a. For example, when the sub control board 400a determines to execute the step-up effect, the sub-control board 400a transmits an effect designation command for designating the step-up effect to the liquid crystal control CPU 601 of the effect control board 600a.

  The backlight relay board 450 is connected to the effect control board 600a, and the other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment. Then, the backlight relay board 450 receives a lamp lighting signal specified by the system lamp command from the effect control board 600a (a signal designating lighting, blinking, and extinguishing of the left backlight 461, the middle backlight 462, and the right backlight 463). When received, the data is transmitted to the designated left backlight substrate 451, middle backlight substrate 452, and right backlight substrate 453.

  The left backlight board 451, the middle backlight board 452, and the right backlight board 453 turn on and blink the left backlight 461, the middle backlight 462, and the right backlight 463 according to the lamp lighting signal specified by the received system lamp command. Turn off the light.

(Amplifier board 500)
The amplifier board 500 is the same as that of the first embodiment.

(Production control board 600a)
The effect control board 600a is connected to the sub control board 400a, and the backlight relay board 450, the amplifier board 500, the effect device drive board 650, and the panel LED relay board 700a are connected.

  The effect control board 600a includes a lamp CPU 608, a lamp ROM 609, and a lamp RAM 610 in addition to the same configuration as the effect control board 600 in the first embodiment.

(LCD control CPU 601)
The liquid crystal control CPU 601 transmits a desired command to the lamp CPU 608 in addition to the same function as the liquid crystal control CPU 601 in the first embodiment.

  For example, when the liquid crystal control CPU 601 receives an effect designation command from the sub CPU 401, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 transmits a command for performing an effect corresponding to the effect designation command to the VDP 607 and a command for outputting the effect sound. Is transmitted to the sound source IC 605, and an effect lamp command for the lamp effect is transmitted to the lamp CPU 608.

  Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 executes a character effect when the sub CPU 401 determines a character effect (effect in which a specific character appears) and receives an effect designation command for designating the character effect. Is sent to the VDP 607. Based on this command, the VDP 607 creates a display list or the like corresponding to the character effect, and performs processing such as causing the liquid crystal display device 46 to output an effect image.

Further, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 transmits a command for outputting a sound corresponding to the character effect to the sound source IC 605. The sound source IC 605 outputs a sound corresponding to the character effect based on this command.
The liquid crystal control CPU 601 transmits an effect lamp command for controlling the lamp corresponding to the character effect to the lamp CPU 608.

  On the other hand, when the liquid crystal control CPU 601 receives an audio output designation command from the sub CPU 401, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 transmits the audio output designation command to the sound source IC 605.

(Lamp CPU608)
The lamp CPU 608 is provided on the effect control board 600a. The lamp CPU 608 is provided to read a program and data relating to lamp control stored in the lamp ROM 609 and output a lamp signal for turning on, blinking, and turning off the lamp and LED of each display unit. In the present embodiment, lamp CPU 608 is also configured to output a drive signal or the like for a production device or the like.

  When the lamp CPU 608 receives the system lamp command, the lamp CPU 608 transmits a lamp lighting signal designated by the system lamp command to the backlight relay board 450, the rendering device drive board 650, and the panel LED relay board 700a.

(Lamp ROM609)
The lamp ROM 609 is provided on the effect control board 600a. The lamp ROM 609 is provided for storing programs, data (lighting patterns, etc.) and the like related to lamps that are turned on, blinking, and turned off when performing an effect. In the present embodiment, the lamp ROM 609 also stores a drive pattern of the effect device or the like.

(Ramp RAM 610)
The lamp RAM 610 is provided on the effect control board 600a. The lamp RAM 610 functions as a work area for developing the lighting pattern of the lamp CPU 608 and the like, and is provided for temporarily storing data read from the lamp ROM 609.

(Director drive board 650)
The rendering device drive board 650 is the same as that in the first embodiment.

(Comparator LED relay board 700a)
The panel LED relay board 700a is connected to the effect control board 600a, and as described above, commands transmitted from the sub control board 400a are received via the effect control board 600a. Further, the panel LED relay board 700a is obtained by removing the effect button sensor 710s and the cross key board 711 from the panel LED relay board 700 according to the first embodiment.

(Director drive relay board 750)
The stage device drive relay board 750 is the same as that of the first embodiment.

(Direction button relay board 900)
The effect button relay board 900 is connected to the sub-control board 400a. The effect button relay board 900 is provided with an effect button sensor 710s and a cross key board 711.

(Direction button sensor 710s)
The effect button sensor 710 s is the same as that in the first embodiment, and is connected to the effect button 21.

(Cross key board 711)
The cross key board 711 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and is connected to the cross key 22.

  When the sub CPU 401 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment configured as described above receives a command indicating a specific detection result from the main control board 300, it specifies audio data to be output in accordance with the detection result. A system lamp that transmits a voice output designation command of the voice data to the effect control board 600a (the liquid crystal control CPU 601), specifies a lamp to be lit according to the detection result, and designates lighting of the lamp. The command is transmitted to the effect control board 600a (the lamp CPU 608).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 401 receives a winning combination command or the like from the main control board 300, the sub CPU 401 determines a predetermined effect based on the winning combination command and sends an effect designation command for specifying the determined effect to the effect control board 600a ( To the liquid crystal control CPU 601).

  In the effect control board 600a, when the sound output designation command is received, the sound source IC 605 reads the sound data designated in the sound output designation command from the sound source ROM 606 or the like and outputs it from the speaker. When receiving the system lamp command, the lamp CPU 608 reads the lamp data specified in the system lamp command from the lamp ROM 609 or the like, and turns on, blinks, or turns off the specified lamp.

  On the other hand, when the effect control board 600a receives an effect designation command, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 reads out sound control and lamp control necessary for the desired effect from the liquid crystal control ROM 602 or the like based on the effect designation command, and the sound source IC 605. Instruct the lamp CPU 608 to perform a predetermined lamp lighting instruction.

  In the configuration in which the stop button operation display unit 35 described in the first embodiment notifies the operation order of the push order bell combination, the lamp emission pattern of the operation order corresponding to the selected push order bell combination is shown. Is transmitted from the sub-control board 400a to the lamp CPU 608, and the lamp CPU 608 controls the stop button operation LED board 708 to control the stop button operation display unit to emit light.

  As mentioned above, according to this invention, when it is a 1st privilege game, based on music data, a music is output from a specific reproduction | regeneration part, and a 2nd privilege game advantageous to a player rather than a 1st privilege game In this case, based on the music data, after the music is output from the normal playback portion, the music related to the specific playback portion is output. Thereby, even if it is a 1st privilege game, since the music which concerns on a specific reproduction | regeneration part can be listened to, the music which can be reproduced | regenerated can fully be enjoyed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the gaming interests due to insufficient enjoyment of reproducible music.

  In the present embodiment, the establishment of the predetermined condition corresponds to, for example, a start lever operation, a predetermined symbol combination being stopped and displayed, or a game ball winning a winning device. .

  In the present embodiment, the first bonus state, the second bonus state, and the third bonus state constitute a privilege game that is advantageous to the player of the present invention. Note that the bonus game is not limited to these, for example, an ART state (RT4 game state), a bonus game state such as a big bonus or a regular bonus, an RT game state in which a re-game is established with a high probability, and an operation order of a specific role AT gaming state for notification, a winning game state where the winning device is opened for a predetermined time and the game ball can be entered, a probability changing gaming state in which the winning probability to the jackpot gaming state is improved, an openable winning device A short game state may be applied when the player opens with a high probability.

  The execution of the first award game means that the first award game is being executed from the timing when the combination of symbols constituting the first award game is stopped and displayed, or the symbol constituting the first award game. The first privilege game may be being executed from a timing after a predetermined time has elapsed since the combination was stopped and displayed.

  The execution of the second award game means that the second award game is being executed from the timing when the combination of symbols constituting the second award game is stopped and displayed, or the symbol constituting the second award game. The second privilege game may be being executed from the timing after a predetermined time has elapsed since the combination was stopped and displayed.

  In this embodiment, when the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not to shift to the bonus game and determines to shift to the bonus game of the present invention, the sub CPU 401 is more than the first bonus game and the first bonus game. A privilege game determining means for determining a privilege game to be given to the player is configured from the second privilege game advantageous to the player. The main CPU 301 may be responsible for the privilege game determination means. In this case, when the main CPU 301 determines whether or not to shift to the bonus game and determines to shift to the bonus game, the bonus game to be given to the player from the first bonus game and the second bonus game. To decide.

  In the present embodiment, the sound source ROM 606 constitutes music data storage means for storing music data composed of a normal playback portion and a specific playback portion of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the upper left speaker 40, the lower left speaker 41, the upper right speaker 42, and the lower right speaker 43 constitute sound output means of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 401 performs notification control for notifying a determination result as to whether or not to shift to a privilege game advantageous to the player via the notification means at a specific timing in the unit game of the present invention. Configure the means.

  In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs sound output control based on the music data via the sound output means based on the music data stored in the music data storage means of the present invention. Configure. The sound control means may be assigned to the sound source IC 605 or the VDP 607.

  In the present embodiment, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 constitute a plurality of reels according to the present invention in which a plurality of symbols are arranged on the peripheral surface. The plurality of symbols corresponds to the symbols shown in FIG. 6 arranged on each reel.

  In the present embodiment, the start switch 10sw constitutes a start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by the player of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 constitutes a winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination based on the start operation detected by the starting operation detecting means of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 constitute stop operation means provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the left stop switch 11sw, the middle stop switch 12sw, and the right stop switch 13sw detect that the stop operation means provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels of the present invention is stopped. The stop operation detection means is configured.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 and the reel control board 150 variably display a plurality of reels based on the start operation detected by the start operation detection unit of the present invention, and stop by the stop operation detection unit. Reel control means for stopping and displaying a plurality of reels based on the detected operation is configured. Note that the reel control means may be configured by only the main CPU 301.

  In the present embodiment, a gaming machine used for a spinning machine (slot machine) has been described. However, the gaming machine may be used for a pachinko gaming machine, a sparrow ball gaming machine, or an arrangement ball gaming machine.

1 gaming machine 2 cabinet 3 front door 4 hinge mechanism 5 key hole 6 medal slot 7 BET button 7sw BET switch 8 MAXBET button 8sw MAXBET switch 9 settlement button 9sw settlement switch 10 start lever 10sw start switch 11 left stop button 11sw left stop switch 12 Middle stop button 12sw Middle stop switch 13 Right stop button 13sw Right stop switch 14 Return button 15 Selector 15s Selector sensor 16s Error release sensor 17s Door open / close sensor 18 Left reel 19 Middle reel 20 Right reel 21 Production button 22 Cross key 23 Display window 24 Start lamp 25 1st BET lamp 26 2nd BET lamp 27 3rd BET lamp 28 Stored number display device 29 Discharged number display device 30 Allowable display lamp 31 Replay display Amplifier 32 Bonus display unit 33 ART display unit 34 RUSH display unit 35 stop button operation display unit 35L left stop button operation display section 35C in the stop button operation display unit 35R right stop button operation display unit 36 start lever LED
37 Waist panel 38 Receptacle unit 39 Medal payout opening 40 Upper left speaker 41 Lower left speaker 42 Upper right speaker 43 Lower right speaker 44 Setting display section 45 Setting change button 45sw Setting change switch 46 Liquid crystal display device 47 External concentration terminal board 48 Setting change Key hole 49sw Setting change key switch 50 Production device 51 Base portion 52 Handle portion 53 Sheath portion 100 Status board 150 Reel control board 151 Left stepping motor 152 Middle stepping motor 153 Right stepping motor 154s Left reel sensor 155s Middle reel sensor 156s Right reel sensor 200 power board 201 power button 201sw power switch 202 hopper 203 auxiliary storage 203s auxiliary storage sensor 204 discharge slit 205 hopper guide member 206 guide member 07 dispensing guide member 250 set the switch board 300 the main control board 301 the main CPU
302 Main ROM
303 Main RAM
304 Main random number generator 400, 400a Sub control board 401 Sub CPU
402 Sub ROM
403 Sub RAM
404 Sub-random number generator 450 Backlight relay board 451 Left backlight board 452 Middle backlight board 453 Right backlight board 461 Left backlight 462 Middle backlight 463 Right backlight 500 Amplifier board 600, 600a Production control board 601 Liquid crystal control CPU
602 LCD control ROM
603 Liquid crystal control RAM
604 CGROM
605 Sound source IC
606 Sound source ROM
607 VDP
650 effect device drive board 651 left effect device motor 652s upper left effect device sensor 653s lower left effect device sensor 654 right effect device motor 655s upper right effect device sensor 656s lower right effect device sensor 657s left liquid crystal lift motor 658s left upper liquid crystal lift sensor 659s lower left liquid crystal lift Sensor 660 Right LCD lift motor 661s Upper right LCD lift sensor 662s Lower right LCD lift sensor 700, 700a Panel LED relay board 701 MAXBET button LED board 702 Stop button LED board 703 Production button LED board 704 Lumbar panel LED board 705 Bonus display LED board 706 ART display LED board 707 RUSH display LED board 708 Stop button operation LED board 709 Start lever LED board 710 Production button sensor 711 Cross key -Board 721 MAXBET button LED
722 Stop button LED
722L Left stop button LED
722C Middle stop button LED
722R Right stop button LED
723 Production Button LED
724 Lumbar panel LED
750 Production device drive relay board 800 Production device control board 801 Upper left production apparatus board 802 Lower left production apparatus board 803 Upper right production apparatus board 804 Lower right production apparatus board 811 Upper left production apparatus 812 Left lower production apparatus 813 Upper right production apparatus 814 Lower right production apparatus 850 LED control board 851 Top LED board 852 Corner LED board 853 Side LED board 854 Receptacle side LED board 855 Receptacle LED board 861 Corner LED
862 Top LED
863 Side LED
864 saucer side LED
865 Receptacle LED
900 Production Button Relay Board
?

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that determines whether or not to shift to a privilege game advantageous to a player by satisfying a predetermined condition,
When it is determined to shift to the award game, the award game for determining the award game to be given to the player from the first award game and the second award game having a longer game possible period than the first award game. A determination means;
In music data based on the same music, a music composed of a normal playback portion starting from the first timing and a specific playback portion starting from the second timing after the first timing Music data storage means for storing data;
Sound output means for outputting music based on the music data stored in the music data storage means;
Sound control means for controlling output of music based on the music data via the sound output means;
With
The sound control means is
By the award game determination means, when it is determined to grant the first award game during the execution of the first award game, on the basis of the music data, leaving the music from the previous SL specific playback section Force
By the award game determination means, when it is determined to grant the second award game, during execution of said second privilege game, on the basis of the music data, leaving the music from the previous SL normal reproduction portion after force, a game machine, characterized in output to Rukoto the music according to the prior SL specific playback section.